Home

Clarion MAX983HD User Guide Manual - CaRadio

1. 20 DVD Video Operations 25 MP3 WMA Operations 33 Audio CD Operations 37 Music Catcher Operations 40 Using Recent Album List oi nic 46 4 Operations of Accessories euunnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnen 47 TV Tuner Operations 47 AUX Operations 50 iPod Operations 51 Telephone Operations 56 CCD Camera Operations 59 Rear Monitor Operations 60 Remote Control Operations 61 5 System Setting 63 General Settings 63 Navigation Settings 66 Audio Settings 66 Adjusting the Monitor 67 User Settings 68 Setting Stored Data TO Importing Data Using the SD Card 70 Service Options 72 Setting Safety Camera 73 6 1 EE EE EEE 74 Voice Command Operations ssiri aisig iraniani asini 74 Troubleshooting 75 Error Messages 77 Specification cidcid talla t c 78 INSTALLATION AND WIRE CONNECTION MANUAL nnnnnnnvennnvvnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnner 79 Safety Precautions cocina Dra 79 Package Contents een 81 Contents in the Accessory Bag No 1 8 81 Contents in the Accessory Bag No 2 9 81 Installing the Main Unit ee 82 Installing the GPS Antenna
2. RCA pin i lead Video input for TV tuner AUX a 1 eh i E TV tuner mme eNET cable Audio output for rear monitor An Audio SE input for AUX Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 87 MAX983HD TYNNYIN NOILO3NNO9 HIM ONY NOILYTIVISNI TANVIN NOILIINNOI JIM ANY NOILYTIVISNI Wire Connection Power supply lead Description REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHTO FRONT RIGHT FRONT RIGHTO FRONT LEFT FRONT LEFTO REAR LEFT REAR LEFTO 12 V MAIN POWER 1 TUNER B ILLUMINATION 12 V ACCESSORY 1 EARTH ISO CONNECTOR Spare terminal Yellow Note 1 In certain vehicles Volkswagen Opel Vauxhall it is necessary to exchange the accessory lt Red gt and the main power lt Yellow gt connection to avoid overload and loss of memory Notes on installing the RDS TMC antenna For vehicles that do not allow radio wave penetration such as heat reflection glass heat insulation glass or radio wave interception glass the receiver sensitivity may decrease For details speak to the dealer where you purchased the unit The receiver sensitivity may weaken by interference from other antennas within the vehicle therefore try to install it away from other antennas To prevent noise wire t
3. To use this model properly read this Owner s Manual carefully and keep this manual for your future reference In case of any trouble with this player please contact Apparatus Claims of U S Patent Nos 4 631 603 4 819 098 4 907 093 5 315 448 and 6 516 132 licensed for limited viewing uses only Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and GP cannot be used or distributed without a license from MSL your nearest AUTHORIZED service station To prevent direct exposure to the s laser beam do not try to open the MESSER ARE enclosure While driving set the volume so that sound from outside the vehicle can be heard Driving without hearing sound from the outside of the vehicle may cause a traffic incident INFORMATION FOR USERS CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS TO THIS PRODUCT NOT APPROVED BY THE MANUFACTURER WILL VOID THE WARRANTY ii SERIAL No QY 5003E CF 276 0471 00 Clarion Co Ltd re MADE IN HUNGARY Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 3 MAX983HD jenuew saumo jenuew s 1aumg About This Manual The following two manuals are provided to this system Owner s Manual Audio Visual General amp Installation This Book This manual hereinafter referred to as Audio Manual explain
4. 85 Installing the Microphone for Voice Control 86 Connecting the Speed Sensor 86 Wire Connection 87 gownloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 2 Basic Operations Name and Function of the Controls Name of the Controls Clarion MAXS73HD amp NAVI Navi AV a OPEN CLOSE Es ho Blinking LED SRC Source PS FIG GI P VOICE MAP Volume 144 gt gt Search MENU OUT Zoom Out IN Zoom In Function of the Controls NAVI Navi AV button Press this button to switch the screen between the Navigation mode screen and AV mode menu screen OPEN CLOSE button Press this button to open close the operation panel Keep pressing this button more than 2 seconds to adjust the angle of the operation panel The angle of the operation panel is adjustable in the range of 0 to 30 Sensor Receives the infrared signals sent from the optional remote control unit operating range 30 in all directions li INFO button Press this button to display hide the RDS TMC menu screen in any mode When the Antenna function is set to Auto Antenna from the General menu in the Setting mode keep pressing this button more than 2 seconds to extend collapse the antenna Be sure to collapse the antenna
5. Error Messages Problem Cause Remedy DVD Player MECHANISM ERROR A disc is caught inside the DVD player and is not ejected This is a failure of DVD player s mechanism Please consult your store of purchase DISC ERROR A disc cannot be played due to scratches etc Replace with a non scratched non warped disc A disc is loaded up side down inside the DVD player and does not play jenuew saumo Eject the disc then reload it properly INCORRECT FILE FORMAT WMA files not supported by this unit are played Perform the operation such as skipping a file Scan repeat and random playback mode may be cancelled SD Card ACCESS ERROR Memory Card access failed The SD card is not set correctly Set the SD card again The SD card is not recognised Set another SD card Hard Disk Drive HIGH TEMP ERROR Please wait until the temperature becomes normal The HDD cannot be accessed because the temperature in the vehicle is extremely high Please wait until the temperature becomes appropriate LOW TEMP ERROR Please wait until the temperature becomes normal The HDD cannot be accessed because the temperature in the vehicle is extremely low Please wait until the temperature becomes appropriate HDD ACCESS ERROR Please consult a dealer The HDD cannot be accessed The sectors or clusters of the HDD may be damaged
6. Quick POI Settings P 46 1 Touch the NAVI key on the Map screen 4 Select the desired place you wish to go to by The Navi Shortcut menu is displayed touching it 2 Touch the Quick POI key 5 Touch the Start key The Quick POI screen is displayed The route guidance to the destination will 3 Select a category by touching it start In case a route existed before the The list of the nearby places or along the route selected POI will be added as waypoint of the selected category is displayed When the destination is already set the following keys are displayed at the top of the screen by Dist The list of nearby POI ordered by the distance from the current location is displayed after pressing this key This key is displayed when displaying the list screen of POI along the route along the Route The list of POI along the route ordered by the distance from the current location is displayed after pressing this key This key is displayed when displaying the list screen of nearby POI Agwaloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Searching Your Destination from the Favourite Frequent List You can enter a destination by selecting from the list ofthe registered favourite places or the places often visited For detailed usage of the Favourite Frequent list see Using Favourite Frequent List P 54 By Favourite By Frequent You can enter a destination by selecting a place You can enter a des
7. Turn list on Route During the route guidance mode Set to ON to display the list of the name distance and turning direction of the guidance intersections at the left of the screen ON Displays the Turn List screen e OFF Hides the Turn List screen Intersection Map Changes the setting of the Intersection Close up display which displays the turning direction of the next guidance intersection ON Displays the Intersection Close up display e OFF Hides the Intersection Close up display Main Map Heading Changes the orientation of the map This control is available when the main map or the right map is set to 2D mode e Heading Up The map is displayed with the travelling direction pointing up e North Up The map is displayed with north pointing up Left Map Scale Changes the scale of the left map This control is available when a divided map mode is selected Increases the map scale and shows a more detailed map E Decreases the map scale and shows the map of a wider area MAX983HD 1 7 Manipulating the Map Screen Left Map Heading Changes the orientation of the left map This control is available when the divided map screen is displayed Heading Up The map is displayed with the travelling direction pointing up North Up The map is displayed with north pointing up 3D Map Angle Changes the angle of the 3D map This control is available when the 3D
8. 3 Touch the Yes key The system will be restarted System Information You can confirm the version number of the map data and the system software In addition you can confirm the remaining capacity for the Music Catcher here 1 Touch the Info key The system information is displayed Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 65 jenuew 5 12UMQ Navigation Settings When you touch the Navigation key from the Setting menu you can set various setting concerning the navigation system For details see the Navigation Manual Audio Settings When you touch the Audio key from the Setting menu you can set various settings concerning the audio features Adjusting the balance fader 1 Touch the Edit key of the BAL FAD item 2 Touch the f or 4 key to adjust the fader level e The factory default setting is 0 Adjustment range front 12 to rear 12 You can also adjust the level by directly touching the desired position of the coordinate 1 Emphasises the sound from the front speakers 4 Emphasises the sound from the rear speakers 3 Touch the or gt key to adjust the balance level The factory default setting is 0 e Adjustment range left 13 to right 13 You can also adjust the level by directly touching the desired position of the coordinate Emphasises the sound from the left speakers gt Emphasises the sound from the right speakers Adj
9. Ajoneuvon kuljettajana vastaat aina itse liikenneturvallisuudestasi Liikenneonnettomuuksien taikka liikennerikkomusten v ltt miseksi sinun tulee muistaa ett vallitsevat liikenneolosuhteet ja liikennes nn t ovat ensisijaisia navigointij rjestelm n sis lt m n tietoon verrattuna T st seuraa ett ohjelmisto saattaa sis lt ep tarkkaa tai puutteellista tietoa joka johtuu ajan kulumisesta muuttuneista olosuhteista ja ohjelmiston luomiseen k ytettyjen tietol hteiden luonteesta Muista aina ajaessasi huomioida vallitsevat liikenneolosuhteet ja liikennes nn t T m navigointij rjestelm ei sis ll saatika vastaa mill n muodoin tiedoista jotka koskevat tieliikennelains d nt nopeusrajoituksia tieolosuhteita mukaan lukien tien kaltevuutta luokitusta ja tai tien pinnan olosuhteita liikenn inti haittaavien rajoittavien tietojen mukaan lukien siltojen ja tunneleiden korkeus ja leveystietoja ja tai muita kulloinkin vallitsevia liikenn inti ja tai tieolosuhteista Muista aina luottaa ajaessasi omaan harkintaasi ja huomioi kulloinkin vallitsevat ajo olosuhteet Minimoi ajon aikana j rjestelm n n yt n katselemiseen k ytt m si aika ata loaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Sikkerhetsregler Advarsel Dette navigasjonssystemet bor ikke benyttes som en erstatning til Deres egne vurderinger og veivalg Navigasjonssystemets anbefaling av rute m aldri be
10. MAN Lee Br grp Ad Win The 2D map is a map screen represented to the The 3D map is a map screen using a viewing plane just like the map of atlases It is suitable for position above the vehicle while looking in the searching a destination and confirming the road direction of the car heading It is suitable for or route understanding the image of the direction because the perspective of the travelling direction can be adjusted as required Rpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Map Screen Features Indicators on the map Indicators displayed on the Map screen are different according to the conditions at that time This section explains the main indicators displayed on the Map screen Indicators on the map of the current location 18 5 7km D AV Shortcut key Displays the AV Shortcut menu Letters displayed on the key vary to indicate the current mode of the AV feature Current street name Shows the name of the current street Vehicle mark Indicates the current location and direction of your vehicle You can change this mark gt Vehicle Icon P 45 4 Clock Displays the current time NAVI key Displays the Navi Shortcut menu 6 Speed Limit Icon Generally the icon shows the speed limit of the current main road where a speed data is supplied by a map database When a speed data was changed the numerals on the icon are changed and the indication blinks for a few
11. Name of road type Touching the key increases decreases the average speed by 5 km h Reset Touching the Reset key resets the average speeds to the factory settings Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD The Guidance Voice Settings menu screen is displayed Touch the desired menu item to set Guidance Voice Sets whether to activate the voice guidance Vol Normal Speed Adjusts the volume of the voice guidance when the vehicle speed is normal Vol High Speed Adjusts the volume of the voice guidance when the vehicle speed is high Voice Announcements Sets the number of repetitions of the voice guidance per guidance point Map View settings You can change settings concerning the map appearance 1 2 Touch the Map View key The Map View menu screen is displayed Touch the desired menu item to set For details of the setting items see Changing the map appearance P 16 However the Hide Map key is not displayed on this screen Navigation Settings Map Design settings You can change the map appearance such as the colours of the map type of vehicle mark etc Map Colour Selects the colours of the map for the Day mode when illumination is turned OFF and for the Night mode when illumination is turned ON Map Colour Day Map Colour Night Touch the item key then touch one of the Map Colour 1 t
12. Please consult your nearest dealer If an error display other than the ones described above appears press the Reset button If the problem persists turn off the power and consult your store of purchase When the Reset button is pressed frequencies of radio stations titles etc stored in memory are cleared Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 77 MAX983HD jenuew s 1aumg Specification GPS aerial Mode Microstrip flat aerial Dimension 30 4 W x 11 7 H x 35 5 D mm Impedance 50 Ohm Navigation System GPS receiving frequency 1575 42 MHz C A Code Sensibility 130 dBm or better Number of GPS channels 15 channels FM Tuner Frequency Range 87 50 MHz to 108 00 MHz Usable Sensitivity 9 dBf 50dB Quieting Sensitivity 15 dBf Alternate Channel Selectivity 70 dB Stereo Separation 1 kHz 32 dB Frequency Response 3 dB 30 Hz to 15 kHz AM Tuner Frequency Range MW 531 kHz to 1602 kHz LW 153 kHz to 279 kHz Usable Sensitivity 28 dBuV DVD Player System Digital Versatile Disc System with CODA capable Usable discs DVD video disc Compact disc Frequency Response 20 Hz to 20 kHz CD 1 dB 2 dB Signal to Noise Ratio 80 dB 1 kHz Dynamic Range 80 dB 1 kHz Distortion 0 05 Audio Amplifier Maximum power output 200 W 50 W x 4 Output Power 4 x 31 W DIN 45324 B 14 4 V Speaker impedance 4 Q 4 to 8 Q allowable Input Audio input 130 60mVrms input im
13. SI VOUS N ACCEPTEZ PAS LES TERMES DE CE CONTRAT VEUILLEZ RETOURNER VOTRE FOURNISSEUR DANS LES MEILLEURS DELAIS LA BASE DE DONNEES AINSI QUE TOUS LES ELEMENTS QUI L ACCOMPAGNENT AFIN D EN OBTENIR LE REMBOURSEMENT PROPRIETE La Base de donn es ainsi que les droits de propri t intellectuelle et les droits d auteur ou les droits voisins qui y sont attach s sont d tenus par NAVTEQ ou par ses conc dants de licences La propri t du support contenant la Base de donn es est conserv e par NAVTEQ et ou votre fournisseur jusqu ce que vous ayez int gralement pay les sommes dues a NAVTEQ et ou votre fournisseur conform ment au pr sent Contrat ou tout autre contrat similaire aux termes duquel les biens vous ont t remis CONCESSION DE LICENCE NAVTEQ vous conc de une licence non exclusive d utilisation de la Base de donn es pour votre usage personnel ou le cas ch ant pour un usage professionnel interne Cette licence ne comprend pas le droit de conc der des sous licences LIMITES SUR L UTILISATION L utilisation de la Base de donn es est limit e au syst me sp cifique pour lequel elle a t cr e A l exception des dispositions express ment pr vues par la loi par exemple les dispositions des l gislations nationales transposant les Directives europ ennes 91 250 portant sur les logiciels et 96 9 portant sur les Bases de donn es vous n tes pas autoris extraire ou r utiliser une ou plusieurs
14. Screen examples e 2D Map Rewnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Manipulating the Map Screen T RR Street Brackloy Strwot Touch the View key on the Map screen of the current vehicle location The Map View menu is displayed Note You can also adjust these settings from Navigation of the Setting menu gt Map View settings P 44 ae Map View Hide Map Back 20 20 20 20 30 essi 71 Turn list on Route Intersection Map ON x Main Map Heading Heading Up North Up Please select a menu item 0 00 21 V key Scrolls the Map View menu screen up or down 2D key Changes to the map represented to the plane just like the map of atlases Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 3D key Changes to the 3D map using a viewing position above the vehicle while looking in the direction of the car heading Note To change the 3D angle set the 3D Map Angle as mentioned below 2D 2D key Displays two 2D maps right and left on the divided screen This is convenient to view two maps with different scales Note To change the orientation or scale of the left map set the Left Map Heading or Left Map Scale as mentioned below 2D 3D key Displays a 2D map at the left and a 3D map at the right on the divided screen Note To change the orientation or scale of the left map use the Left Map Heading or Left Map Scale as mentioned below
15. 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button to open the operation panel When playing back music data in the SD card the Stop message will appear in the display when the operation panel is completely opened 2 Push the head of the SD card slightly to eject the SD card The SD card will be stuck out and NO MEMORY CARD will appear in the display 3 Remove the SD card then press the I OPEN CLOSE button to close the operation panel Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 17 MAX983HD s Selecting Media Source You can change the media source to be played from the Source menu screen 1 Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen FEB Source Back FM AM Music SD Card Catcher Telephone 270ne Please select a source 2 Touch the desired Source key you wish to change to The system is switched to the corresponding source mode When you pressed the SRC Source button from the AV mode the corresponding AV mode menu screen will be displayed When you pressed it from the Navigation mode the previous screen will be displayed Available media sources Key name Corresponding source Referto Description mode FM AM Tuner mode gt P 20 DVD CD DVD Video mode gt P 25 The source mode differs depending on the Audio CD mode gt P 37 OT of the disc set in the DVD MP3 WMA mode gt P 33 When no disc is set in the DVD player NO DISC will b
16. 7176 JAPAN 7480 JORDAN 7479 KUWAIT 7587 LEBANON 7666 LESOTHO 7683 SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN ISLANDS Hpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 8374 DVD Video Operations Setting up the parental level You can change the level of parental lock audiovisual restriction This function allows cutting scenes that are unfavourable for children or replacing them automatically with other scenes prepared in advance For example by replacing scenes of radical violence or portrayals of sex with safe scenes you can make a trouble free story as if it were so from the beginning 1 Touch the Parental Level key The Password input screen is displayed 2 Touch the ten key 0 to 9 to input a 4 digit password and touch the OK key e The factory default setting of the password is 0000 3 Touch the desired Level key to select level 1 to 8 or No Parental The factory default setting is No Parental 4 Touch the Back key The relationship between DVD video category codes and parental level are shown in the table below Use this table when setting the parental level LEVEL7 NC 17 NO ONE 17 AND UNDER ADMITTED LEVEL6 R RESTRICTED LEVEL4 PG 13 PARENTS STRONGLY CAUTIONED LEVEL3 PG PARENTAL GUIDANCE SUGGESTED LEVEL1 G GENERAL AUDIENCES The contents that the parental level restricts vary wi
17. Displaying track information of a track 1 Touch the List key to display the Track list screen 2 Touch the desired track key you wish to display the track information then touch the key displayed at the right of the Track key The track information of specified track is displayed Album A Girl Like Me Bonus Trac Track We Ride Artist Rihanna Genre Blues Please select a menu item 3 Touch the Back key Scrolling titles When a title or other information displayed on the screen is longer than the text area you can confirm the entire text by scrolling it 1 Displaying the text you wish to scroll touch the key displayed at the right of the text area The text will scroll once Other various play functions e This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Touch the Option key The Option menu screen is displayed 28 Option Scan Repeat Random Please select the desired item Afp waloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Audio CD Operations 2 Touch a touch key of the function you want to play Track scan playback Touch the Track key of the Scan item This operation scans and plays back all tracks recorded in the disc the first 10 seconds for each e T SCN is displayed on the information pane Track repeat playback Touch the Track key of the Repeat item This operation plays back the current track repe
18. Diverted routes with traffic information considered When a TMC event is found on your route a diverted route with traffic information considered is automatically displayed Confirm or cancel the diverted route and touch the OK key to start the route guidance If you do not do anything the diverted route will not be used Notes on the Traffic Information The information given by RDS TMC is only a reference it may not match the actual traffic conditions Be sure to follow the actual traffic regulations and traffic conditions Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 41 6 System Settings You can set various settings of the navigation system from the Setting menu Setting menu screen 1 lt Setting General Navigation Monitor Screen Colour Auto Night O Please select a menu item 0 00 Setting menu screen 2 e Setting Back Stored Data Import Data Service Option O Please select a menu item 1 Pressthe Set button The Setting menu screen is displayed Touching the gt Next key displays the additional Setting menu screen 2 Touch the desired menu item For the operation procedure hereafter see the explanation of each section Note For details about the Screen Colour item see Setting the Screen Colour mode P 48 15 da MAX983HD General Settings When you touch the General key from the Setting menu you can set various settings concerning the
19. Do not install the GPS antenna in a place where it may interfere with the operation of the airbag hinder the driver s visual range Do not use this system with the GPS antenna lead cut off The power cables in the lead may sg be short circuited 22 Note EE The supplied GPS antenna is for installing inside the vehicle Do not install it outside the vehicle Install the GPS antenna more than 50 cm away from the main unit other audio devices such as CD player and a radar detector If it is installed near these devices GPS reception may be impaired Itis recommended that the GPS antenna is sited towards the centre of the road where GPS signal interruption is minimised To improve the GPS signal reception install the GPS antenna horizontally on a flat plane Do not wax or paint the cover of the GPS antenna This may reduce the performance of the GPS antenna Install the GPS antenna at least 10 cm away from the windshield Wipe off the dirt of the mounting surface before installing the GPS antenna 1 Stick the double sided tape to the bottom face of the GPS antenna Bottom face of the GPS antenna 2 Mount the GPS antenna Stick it surely on a flat plane of the dashboard towards the centre of the road where GPS signal interruption is minimised 3 Wire the GPS antenna lead Fasten the lead using the lead holders GPS antenna N Stick it on a horizontal place of the dashboard towards
20. 1 Connect your iPod to this unit using the optional connecter cable 2 Pressthe SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen 3 Touch the iPod key to select the iPod mode The system changes to the iPod mode and the iPod mode screen is displayed Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals iPod mode screen MENU key Information pane Janet Jackson All For You Repeat Option 6 06 gt 11 key 14 gt gt key AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen Menu Shuffle Repeat 2001 Intro MAX983HD 51 jenuew 5 12UMQ iPod Operations Controlling the iPod Operation keys MENU key Menu key on the AV Shortcut menu Displays the iPod Menu screen which is used to access to the list screens of the Albums Tracks Artists Genres Playlists Podcasts Composers and Audiobooks stored in the iPod 144 gt gt key lt lt gt gt key on the AV Shortcut menu Use to perform track search operation Touch and hold the key to enable fast forward or fast backward gt 11 key Use to perform playback and pause Shuffle key Use to switch the shuffle mode in the order Song Shuffle Album Shuffle Shuffle OFF When the Song Shuffle is enabled the tracks in the current track list are played back in random order regardless of the order in which they are recorded When the Album Shuffle is enabled all of the albums recorded in the iPod are selecte
21. 250m KNUTSFORD ROAD 2 43 292km Guidance point Remaining distance indication Indicates the next guidance point Indicates the remaining distance to the next P uidance point with the bar gauge Guidance route 9 p gaug Indicates the direction to travel Ap wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Route Guidance Screen Features Turn list on Route The screen is always divided into two displays and the Turn List on Route is displayed on the left display if Turn list on Route is activated The Turn List contains the guidance points next to the vehicle position and will change while travelling When you get near to the next guidance point the left display is automatically changed to the Intersection Map You can set whether to display the Turn List screen or not The factory setting is OFF Changing the map appearance P 16 UNKNOWN STREET NAME CLIFF LANE 4 CLIFF LANE Fm F 2 43 292km O a w key Scrolls the Turn List on Route screen Touching the a key displays the Turn List of the subsequent guidance points Other guidance screens 3 2 km 2 9 km 2 9 km Turn List The list of the guidance points and turning directions are displayed from the items near to the vehicle position and it will change while travelling From the Map Guidance settings menu of the Navigation Setting you can set other functions such as displaying the small turn arrow or
22. The Name entry screen is displayed 3 Enter desired name of the User Profile by touching the characters on the screen 2 da the desired User Profile key you wish al the lastent red character The User Profile screen is displayed Back u ca un Profile y touching ew key a OS previous sereen Registering the User Profile P 68 Displays lower case characters input 3 Touch the Name key if you wish to edit the keyboard name Upper Edit the name then touch the OK key to Displays upper case characters input return to the User Profile screen keyboard 4 Touch the Birthday key if you wish to enter All Clear Enter the birthday information using the Ten Deletes all characters entered so far Key pad displayed on the screen then touch A Z the OK key to return to the User Profile Displays the alphabetic input keyboard screen Accent Once you enter the Birthday information Displays the accent characters input you cannot leave the entry field in blank keyboard 5 Touch the Image key if you wish to assign an 0 9 image Displays the number input keyboard Touch the desired image displayed on the Symbols screen you wish to assign to then touch the Displays the symbol characters input OK key to return to the User Profile screen keyboard e Once you assign an image you cannot OK leave the entry field in blank Fixes the entered characters and proceeds to Touch the User key to assign an image t
23. gt Displaying information registered for the album playlist track P 41 Note This operation is disabled while recording a CD or loading ejecting a disc To edit the information of the album tracks currently recording once exit the Music Catcher mode then enter again after the recording completes 1 Display the item key of the album track you wish to edit information Touch the List Edit key to display the Album list screen e Moreover touch desired Album key to display the Track list screen e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list Touch the key displayed at the right of the desired item key The information of specified item is displayed Perform the edit operation described below according to the specified item When the setting is completed touch the Back key to return to the previous screen O Editing Album information 1 Album 2006 4 1 003 Artist Genre Other Image No Image Get Into Please select a menu item 0 00 By touching the Get Info key you can obtain these information automatically from the Album Information data stored in the hard disk drive if they are listed Touch the Album key edit the displayed album title by touching the characters on the screen then touch the OK key Lower Accent Symbols O Please enter a name 9 Deletes the last entered character Back Returns to the previous screen Lowe
24. DATOS JUNTO CON TODOS LOS ELEMENTOS QUE LO ACOMPA AN PARA SU REEMBOLSO PROPIEDAD La Base de datos y sus correspondientes derechos de autor propiedad intelectual o derechos afines son propiedad de NAVTEQ o de sus licenciadores La propiedad de los medios portadores de la Base de datos ser conservada por NAVTEQ y o por su proveedor hasta la fecha en que usted haya pagado completamente el importe que adeude a NAVTEQ y o a su proveedor en virtud del presente Contrato o de un os contrato s similar es mediante el los cual es hubiese recibido los productos CONCESI N DE LICENCIA NAVTEQ le concede una licencia no exclusiva de utilizaci n de la Base de datos para su uso propio o si procede para uso en las operaciones internas de su empresa Esta licencia no incluye el derecho a conceder sublicencias RESTRICCIONES DE USO La Base de datos est restringida para uso en el sistema espec fico para el cual ha sido desarrollada Salvo en la medida en que las leyes obligatorias as lo permitan expl citamente p ej las leyes nacionales basadas en la Directiva europea sobre software 91 250 y la Directiva sobre bancos de datos 96 9 no podr extraer ni reutilizar partes sustanciales del contenido de la Base de datos ni reproducir modificar adaptar traducir desensamblar descompilar ni usar t cnicas de ingenier a inversa en ninguna parte de la Base de datos Si desea obtener la informaci n de interoperabilidad a que alude la legisl
25. Fuse 10A FUSE Fuse holder gdpnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Clarion Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Copyright 2008 Clarion Co Ltd Printed in Hungary Imprim en Hongrie Gedruckt in Ungarn QY 5003E B Stampato in Ungheria Gedrukt in Hongrarije Impreso en Hungria 2008 5 Y YI 2s0basweHoaded from Caradio WrhiHipetyimnetsnra Algor Trykt i Ungarn
26. I I key stops the simulation temporarily and the gt key restarts the simulation Touching the W key stops the simulation and returns to the previous screen Add Way Pt key Adds waypoints to the suggested route displayed on the map After the list of the place search method is displayed search and select places you wish to set as waypoints by using similar methods as for entering a destination After the Edit Route screen is displayed touch the Add way Point key Up to five waypoints can be specified You can also set waypoints after starting the route guidance Editing the route P 33 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 29 4 Route Guidance After you have entered the destination and started the route guidance you will be guided along the route by screen display and by voice Route Guidance Screen Features As well as the Map screen various guidance screens are displayed during the route guidance mode according to the situation Press the MAP button to switch the screen among the following guidance screens Intersection Map When you get near to approx 300 m or 300 yd 1 km or 1 mile for a motorway from the next guidance point the screen will be divided into two displays and the Intersection Map will be displayed on the left display You can set whether to display the Intersection Map screen or not The factory setting is ON gt Changing the map appearance P 16
27. Various operation advices are displayed according to the status at the bottom of the screen You can refer to them while operating the voice recognition MAX983HD 57 Voice Command Features Example of voice command operation This section provides an example of the destination entry by inputting the location stored in the Address Book by voice 1 Press the VOICE button The Voice Command menu screen is displayed and the announcement for the user to say the desired command and a beep sound are heard The system enters the voice input waiting mode 2 Say Address book When the voice command is recognised the system will respond with a feedback message display the list screen of the Address Book then enter the voice input waiting mode again Note If you say the voice command before a beep sound is heard the voice command cannot be recognised 3 Say the number of the desired list entry The registered place of the number said will be set as the destination Afp wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD List of the Voice Commands Navigation Features The following table lists the fundamental command examples which can be input during the voice input wait mode entered by pressing the VOICE button classified by the usage Note You can omit the term enclosed by Touching the key displays the voice commands usable at that operating condition You can refer to them Common v
28. bt en kopi af Databasen at den i det v sentlige vil yde i overensstemmelse med NAVTEQ s kriterier for n jagtighed og fuldst ndighed der eksisterede p k bsdatoen for Databasen Du kan f udleveret disse kriterier efter anmodning Dersom Databasen ikke yder i overensstemmelse med n rv rende begr nsede garanti vil NAVTEQ g re alle rimelige bestr belser for at reparere eller udskifte din uoverensstemmende kopi af Databasen Dersom disse bestr belser ikke f rer til at Databasen yder i overensstemmelse med de heri anf rte garantier har du valget mellem enten at slutbrugerlicensaftale Dette udg r NAVTEQ s samlede ansvar og dit eneste retsmiddel mod NAVTEQ Med undtagelse af hvad der udtrykkeligt er anf rt i n rv rende afsnit garanterer NAVTEQ ikke eller frems tter nogen anbringender med hensyn til brugen af resultaterne af brugen af Databasen ud fra dennes rigtighed korrekthed p lidelighed eller p anden vis NAVTEQ garanterer ikke at Databasen er eller vil v re fejlfri Ingen mundtlige eller skriftlige informationer eller henstillinger givet af NAVTEQ leverand ren eller nogen anden person danner nogen garanti eller p nogen m de udvider rammerne amy nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD af den herover beskrevne begraensede garanti Den i slutbrugerlicensaftalens anforte begraensede garanti har ingen indflydelse p eller skader nogen lovf stede rettigheder du m tte have i henhold til den lovf stede gara
29. calculation Note The conditions set in the Route Priority menu screen are applied to the current route the recalculation is performed automatically 1 2 Touch the Route Priority key The Route Priority menu screen is displayed Touch the condition you wish to use Touching the Back key returns to the previous screen FR Route Priority Back Fastest Minimize Shortest Route Motorways Route Set Route Preferences Please select a default route priority Fastest Route Calculates the route of which the required time is shortest Minimize Motorways Calculates the route of which motorways are not used as much as possible Shortest Route Calculates the route of which the distance is shortest Set Route Preferences Sets the detailed condition of the route calculation Minimize Toll Roads Minimises the use of toll roads Use Time Restricted Roads Uses roads with restricted usage time Use RDS TMC information Considers the RDS TMC information for routing Use Avoid Area Settings Takes a detour to avoid the registered Avoid Area Use Ferries Uses car ferries for routing Auto Reroute When leaving the suggested route during the route guidance mode a new route is automatically recalculated Changing Editing the Route Settings Confirming the route information Confirms various information of the current route 1 Touch the Route Information key
30. different from the actual play time Tag information entered with 2 byte characters may not be displayed properly on the display Files that the DRM Digital Rights Management function is set cannot be played Add a file extension MP3 or mp3 to an MP3 file and WMA or wma to a WMA file using single byte characters If you add other file extension or forget to add the file extension the file cannot be played Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Precautions when preparing a disc SD card Logical format File system Specify the following formats as the file system Otherwise normal playback may not be possible For a disc Specify ISO9660 level 1 or level 2 without including expansion format as the writing format when writing MP3 WMA files on a disc For an SD card Use the SD cards formatted in FAT16 or V FAT format to store MP3 WMA files Folder structure e The folder hierarchy must be within 8 hierarchical levels Otherwise playback will be impossible You can store the MP3 files and WMA files together in a folder Number of files or folders For a disc e The maximum allowable number of folders is 255 including root directory e The maximum allowable number of files in a disc is 512 e The maximum allowable number of files in a folder is 255 For an SD card e The maximum allowable number of folders is 99 including root directory e The m
31. general features Language setting You can change the language used by the system As for English you can also select the unit of distance km mile Language You can select the language from the following language keys English mile key English km key Francais key Deutsch key Espanol key Italiano key Nederlands key Portugu s key Svenska key Dansk key Note For the languages other than English distances are displayed using the metric system Clock settings You can set various settings concerning the clock 1 Touch the Setting key of the Clock item The Clock menu screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired menu item to set On Screen Clock Shows hides the clock display on the screen Clock Format Changes the clock format to 12 hour 24 hour system Daylight Saving Time Selects whether to apply the daylight saving time or not Offset Adjust Adjusts the current time manually The adjustment is applied as offset value related to the time signal received via GPS Touching the or key shifts the time by 1 minute Normally it is not necessary to adjust because the time is received from the GPS signals automatically Time Zone Sets the time zone You can select from the list of 74 regions including the Auto key When you select the Auto key the clock is automatically switched to the time zone of the country at the v
32. key of the Select on Opening item When this setting is set to ON the User Profile screen to select the User Profile is displayed when turning on the power of this unit gt Turning the power on P 12 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 69 jenuew S I3umg Setting Stored Data From the Stored Data menu you can register edit various data used in the navigation system For details see the Navigation Manual Importing Data Using the SD Card From the Import Data menu you can import the downloaded data from the website For more information about the installation method and the function see the Clarion homepage 1 Touch the gt Next key from the Setting menu 2 Touch the Import Data key to display the Import Data menu Note When you perform the operation of data import confirm that the SD card on which the relevant data is stored has been set to the SD card slot To use the SD card 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button to open the operation panel 2 Confirming the orientation of the SD card insert the SD card surely to the SD card slot until it stops Note For the detailed information on using SD cards see Setting Ejecting an SD Card P 17 A CAUTION Data may be broken when using SD cards in the following situation When disconnecting the SD card or turning the power off while writing or reading data When affected by static electric
33. number of your home Store to Favourite Registers the Home Location to the Favourite list To edit the Home Location 1 Touch the Home Location key 2 Touch the desired Item then edit it Edit Edits data by a similar way as for registering the Home Location To register the Home Location as Step 3 above Delete Deletes the registered Home Location data Store to Favourite Registers the Home Location to the Favourite list Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals OK Terminates the editing then returns to the previous screen Adjust the location by scrolling the map Address Book Registers locations You can register up to 200 locations and can also edit the registered locations To register Locations 1 Touch the Address Book key 2 Touch the None Add New key 3 Search for the location you wish to register by a similar way as for entering destinations 4 Confirm the location found edit items if required then touch the OK key to register it Edit Edits the Stored Location Show Icon on Map Shows hides the Stored Location icon on the map e Name Changes the name of the Stored Location e Icon Changes the icon type for the Stored Location Image Specifies the image data for the Stored Location e Sound Selects the sound heard when you get near the Stored Location Direction Sets the approach direction for locations al
34. parties substantielles du contenu de la Base de donn es ni reproduire copier modifier adapter traduire d sassembler d compiler pratiquer l ing nierie inverse d une quelconque partie de la Base de donn es Si vous souhaitez obtenir des informations n cessaires l interop rabilit conform ment aux dispositions du Code de la propri t intellectuelle apr s transposition de la Directive europ enne sur les logiciels vous devrez laisser NAVTEQ la possibilit de vous fournir lesdites informations dans des d lais et conditions raisonnables y compris au regard des frais qui seront d termin s par NAVTEQ TRANSFERT DE LICENCE Vous n tes pas autoris transf rer la Base de donn es des tiers sauf lorsqu elle est install e dans le syst me pour lequel elle a t cr e ou dans le cas o vous ne conserveriez aucune copie de la Base de donn es et condition que le cessionnaire accepte les termes et conditions du pr sent Contrat et confirme cette acceptation par crit a NAVTEQ Les coffrets de disques ne peuvent tre transf r s ou vendus que complets tels que fournis par NAVTEQ et non en disques s par s GARANTIE LIMITEE NAVTEQ garantit que sous r serve des Avertissements pr vus ci dessous pour une p riode de 12 mois compter de la date d acquisition de votre copie de la Base de donn es cette derni re fonctionnera pour l essentiel conform ment aux Crit res de pr cision et d exhaustivit de N
35. the Destination menu or the Navi Shortcut menu then touch the 43 Recent Album key Jewels Very Best Of Queen Back under My Ski v white Lilie Jewels Very nt Album r Eye to the Te MAX983HD 1 1 jenuew s JaumQ Turning the Power ON OFF Note Start the engine before using this unit Be careful about using this unit for a long time without running the engine If you drain the car s battery too far you may not be able to start the engine and this can reduce the service life of the battery Turning the power on 1 Startthe engine The illuminations on this unit light up and the power is automatically turned on Engine ON position Note The power will be turned on even when the ignition switch is set to ACC ON position When the following Caution screen is displayed Cuutlon Do not operate this device while driving as this can be distracting and may cause you to have an accident This device Is only a navigation aid Official road traffic regulations always take priority over Instructions provided hy this device Touch the OK key The system will resume the last status when the power was turned off When the following User Profile screen is displayed Please select a user EM Lisa Touch your Profile key The system will resume the last status when the power was turned off e This screen is displayed when the Select on Opening item
36. 1 Touch the monitor screen The monitor screen is turned on and resumes the last screen You can also turn on the monitor by pressing any button except for the 4 OPEN CLOSE and Volume buttons ACAUTION e When the system is turned on starting and stopping the engine with its volume raised to the maximum level may harm your hearings Be careful about adjusting the volume e While driving keep the volume level at which external sounds can be heard ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Setting Ejecting a Disc Playable discs This DVD player can play the following discs Playable discs DVD video discs Audio CDs COMPACT DE VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO About CD Extra discs A CD Extra disc is a disc in which a total of two sessions have been recorded The first session is Audio session and the second session is Data session Your personally created CDs with more than second data sessions recorded cannot be played on this DVD player Note When you play a CD Extra disc only the first session will be recognised About playing a CD R RW disc This player can play CD R RW discs previously recorded in Audio CD format or format with MP3 WMA files About playing a DVD R RW or DVD R RW disc This player can play DVD R RW and DVD R RW discs previously recorded in DVD video format or format with MP3 WMA files Discs that cannot be played back This player cannot
37. About the registered marks etc This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorised by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless it is authorised by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery For more information please visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under licence from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote iPod is for legal or rightholder authorised copying only Do not steal musics Windows Media and the Wind
38. Add tracks by the same way as creating a playlist 6 Touch the Move key change the order of the listed tracks then touch the OK key To move a track touch the Track key you wish to move then specify the position to be inserted by touching the corresponding Move key e Touching the Back key cancels the changes and returns to the previous screen MAX983HD 45 jenuew S I3umg Using Recent Album List What is Recent Album list The Recent Album list is one of the following 3 shortcut lists see the Navigation Manual for details of the Favourite list and Frequent list Favourite list You can register your favourite places Frequent list Destinations frequently entered are automatically registered Recent Album list Albums recently selected from the Music Search are automatically registered You can display these lists by easy operation and can specify your desired item to set as the destination or to be played back You can also customise these lists when its Angle is set to 2D list screen Using the Recent Album list Note The Recent Album list is disabled when no music data is recorded in the Music Catcher Displaying the Recent Album list 1 Press the MENU button then touch the NZ key The Favourite list screen is displayed The same operation can be made from the Music Search screen or Navi Shortcut menu 2 Touch the 43 Recent Album key to display the Recent
39. Base de Dados complementarmente aos direitos que pela presente lhe s o conferidos pela NAVTEQ em conformidade com a lei da sua jurisdi o A garantia da NAVTEQ supracitada n o dever afectar os referidos direitos estatut rios pelo que o utilizador poder reivindicar tais direitos para al m dos direitos que lhe assistem ao abrigo da garantia concedida no presente Acordo LIMITA O DE RESPONSABILIDADE O pre o da Base de Dados n o inclui qualquer valor relativo suposi o de risco de danos directos ilimitados indirectos ou consequenciais que possam advir da sua incorrecta utiliza o da Base de Dados Do mesmo modo sob nenhuma circunst ncia dever a NAVTEQ ser respons vel por quaisquer danos indirectos ou consequenciais nestes se incluindo e n o se limitando por perdas de rendimento dados ou utiliza o em que incorra o cliente ou um terceiro em resultado da sua utiliza o da Base de Dados quer seja no quadro de uma ac o contemplada no contrato ou extra negocial ou baseada numa garantia mesmo no caso de a NAVTEQ ter sido informada acerca da possibilidade de ocorr ncia de tais danos Em quaisquer circunst ncias a responsabilidade por danos directos imput vel NAVTEQ limitada ao pre o da sua c pia da Base de Dados A GARANTIA LIMITADA E A LIMITA O DE RESPONSABILIDADE DESCRITAS NO PRESENTE ACORDO N O AFECTAM NEM PREJUDICAM OS SEUS DIREITOS ESTATUTARIOS NO CASO DE TER ADQUIRIDO A BASE DE DADOS DE OU
40. Overeenkomst omschreven beperkte garantie laat rechten die u kunt ontlenen aan eventueel toepasselijke bepalingen van dwingend recht met betrekking tot verborgen gebreken onverlet Indien u de Database niet rechtstreeks van NAVTEQ hebt afgenomen is het mogelijk dat u naast de rechten aan u verleend door NAVTEQ in deze Overeenkomst wettelijke verhaalsmogelijkheden hebt tegen de persoon van wie u de Database hebt verkregen op grond van het toepasselijke recht in uw jurisdictie De beperkte garantie van NAVTEQ tast deze wettelijke verhaalsmogelijkheden niet aan en u mag deze verhaalsacties uitoefenen naast een beroep op de garantie uit deze Overeenkomst BEPERKING VAN AANSPRAKELIJKHEID De prijs van de Database is niet berekend op dekking van risico s van gevolgschade indirecte schade of onbeperkte directe schade als gevolg van uw gebruik van de Database Derhalve zal NAVTEQ in geen geval jegens u aansprakelijk zijn wegens gevolgschade of indirecte schade waaronder begrepen maar niet beperkt tot schade in de vorm van gederfde inkomsten verlies van gegevens of van gebruik voor u of een derde voortvloeiend uit het gebruik van de Database hetzij in een onrechtmatige daadsactie hetzij in een contractuele actie hetzij gebaseerd op een garantie ook al was NAVTEQ op de hoogte gesteld van de mogelijkheid van het intreden van zulke schade In ieder geval is de aansprakelijkheid van NAVTEQ voor directe schade beperkt tot het bedrag dat u hebt betaald voor he
41. TA Traffic Announcement function In the TA standby mode when a traffic announcement broadcast starts the traffic announcement broadcast is received as top priority regardless of the function mode so you can listen to it The Traffic Programme TP automatic tuning is also available Setting TA standby mode 1 Touch the TA key TA will be displayed at the bottom of the screen and the system will automatically search for a TP station TP SEEK When an RDS broadcast station with traffic announcement programmes is received TP will be displayed at the bottom of the screen The TA key is also provided on the RDS TMC menu screen displayed by pressing the 1 INFO button Note If no TP station is received this system continues the search operation Performing the above procedure again makes the TA go off and stops TP station searching When a Traffic Announcement broadcast starts TA indication displayed at the bottom of the screen will blink If you touch the TA key while a Traffic Announcement broadcast is being received the Traffic Announcement broadcast reception is cancelled and the system goes into the TA standby mode Cancelling TA standby mode 1 When TA is displayed on the screen touch the TA key TA on the screen goes off and the TA standby mode is cancelled The TA key is also provided on the RDS TMC menu screen displayed by pressing the 1 INFO button A
42. The Route Information menu screen is displayed Er Route Informati Route Info Preview Simulation P 0 11 11km Route Info Displays the list of route information The main guidance points from the current location to the destination are displayed by the list format When there is a lot of information items you can scroll the list by touching the A a W Y keys Preview Confirms the suggested route by scrolling with the cursor on the map Simulation Simulates the route guidance with moving the vehicle mark automatically Note Refer to the Route Info key in Set Route menu P 28 for details of Preview and Simulation Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Selecting another route Changes the current route to another suggested route with different priority conditions Note When waypoints are set this operation is disabled 1 Touch the More Routes key If a confirmation screen is displayed touch the Yes key The More Route menu screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired priority condition you wish to confirm The route of the specified priority condition is highlighted on the map FR More Routes Shortest Time Minimize M way Shortest Distance OK Fa 0 10 11km Shortest Time Shows the route of which the required time is shortest Minimize M way Shows the route of which motorways are not used as much as possible Shortest Distance Shows the route of which
43. Using the SD Card From the Import Data menu you can import the downloaded data from the website For more information about the installation method and the function see the Clarion homepage 1 Touch the gt gt Next key from the Setting menu 2 Touch the Import Data key to display the Import Data menu Note When you perform the operation of data import confirm that the SD card on which the relevant data is stored has been set to the SD card slot To use the SD card 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button to open the operation panel 2 Confirming the orientation of the SD card insert the SD card surely to the SD card slot until it stops Note For the detailed information on using SD cards see the Audio Manual A CAUTION Data may be broken when using SD cards in the following situation When disconnecting the SD card or turning the power off during writing or reading data When affected by static electricity or electric noises It is recommended that you back up your important data to a personal computer by using the SD card Skin You can import the Skin data stored in the SD card into the hard disk drive Touch the Import key of the Skin item then operate according to the displayed messages To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive touch the Delete key Extra POI You can import the Extra POI data stored in the SD card into the hard disk drive Touch the Import ke
44. You can correct the vehicle position on the Map screen 1 Touch the Adjust Current Location key 2 Scroll the map so that the cursor points to the location you want to set as the vehicle position 3 Touch the OK key 4 Touch the 4773 or key to turn the arrowhead according to the direction of the vehicle 5 Touch the OK key Resetting All Settings to Factory Defaults You can reset all settings to return to the factory settings Note Though all the settings are reset the registered data such as the Address Book Stored Routes stored track data and Avoid Area are not erased 1 Touch the Reset All Settings to Default key 2 From the displayed confirmation screen touch the Yes key Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Navigation System Check You can check the conditions of the navigation system 1 Touch the Navigation System Check key The Navigation System Check screen is displayed and the conditions of GPS and various sensors are shown The detailed situation of GPS is displayed by touching the GPS State key GPS GPS Antenna Speed Pulse To check the Speed Pulse connection move the vehicle a little Reverse Signal To check the Reverse Signal connection once move the gear lever to the back position Gyro Sensor Parking Brake To check the Parking Brake connection once engage the parking brake Illumination To
45. are 3 ways available to recall the preset station Using the Preset keys on the Preset list pane 1 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen 2 Touch the Band key to select the desired TV band TV1 or TV2 3 Touch the desired Preset key to recall a stored TV station From the AV Shortcut menu 1 Touch the Band key to select the desired TV band TV1 or TV2 2 Touch a P ch key to tune in the previous or next preset station e You can also use the I lt and PP Search buttons instead of the P ch keys Agpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD TV Tuner Operations Manual memory 1 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen 2 Touch the Band key to select the desired TV band TV1 or TV2 3 Tune in the desired TV station to be stored 4 Touch and hold the desired Preset key for more than 2 seconds to store the current station into the preset memory Auto store Auto store selects 6 TV stations automatically and stores each one into a preset memory If 6 stations cannot be received with good reception previously stored stations remain and only the strong stations are stored into memory 1 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen 2 Touch the Band key to select the desired TV band TV1 or TV2 3 Touch and hold the AS key for more than 2 seconds A beep sounds and the stations with good reception are stored automatically to the p
46. avoid The route where the section of selected distance is avoided is automatically calculated and the route guidance will be restarted Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Setting a diverted route using traffic information You can change the route based on traffic information 1 Touch the Traffic Detour key The diverted route is displayed with TMC traffic information taken into account When no diverted route is found a message is displayed 2 Confirm the diverted route then touch the OK key The route with traffic information considered is automatically calculated and the route guidance will be restarted Recalculating the route After changing the conditions of the route calculation or when the status of the route is changed you can recalculate the route if you want 1 Touch the Recalculate Route key The route is automatically recalculated and the Set Route screen is displayed 2 Touch the Start key The route guidance will be restarted Editing the route You can edit the current route 1 Touch the Edit Route key The Edit Route screen is displayed 2 Change settings by touching the desired setting item The route is recalculated with added or edited conditions ER Edit Route Destination P gt ABBEY RD KILBURN LONDON Add way Point Current Location Please select an item to edit Destination You can enter a new destination Add way Point Up to 5 way
47. daylight saving time or not Offset Adjust Adjusts the current time manually The adjustment is applied as offset value related to the time signal received via GPS Touching the or key shifts the time by 1 minute Normally it is not necessary to adjust because the time is received from the GPS signals automatically MAX983HD 63 jenuew S I3umg General Settings Time Zone Sets the time zone You can select from the list of 74 regions including the Auto key When you select the Auto key the clock is automatically switched to the time zone of the country at the vehicle position Changing Skin You can change the screen design by using the skin data stored in the hard disk drive 1 Touch the Select key of the Skin Change item 2 Touch the desired item key you wish to set Note This operation is disabled while recording a CD or loading ejecting a disc Beep Sound You can turn ON OFF the beep sounds and menu operation sounds Keyboard Type You can change the keyboard layout used for name entry 1 Touch the item key of the Keyboard item 2 Select the keyboard type by touching one of the following keys ABCDEF key QWERTY key QWERTZ key AZERTY key Voice Recognition You can turn ON OFF the voice recognition feature optional When you touch the OFF key the voice recognition is not available Voice Feedback You can turn ON OFF the voice feedback
48. dodavateli jak koli dlu n stky podle t to Smlouvy nebo podobn smlouvy podobn ch smluv podle n nich je V m poskytov no zbo UD LEN LICENCE Spole nost NAVTEQ V m ud luje nev lucnou licenci k u v n Datab ze pro Va e osobn u it nebo p ipad li to v vahu k intern mu pou it ve Va em podnik n Tato licence nezahrnuje pr vo ud lit sublicence OMEZEN U V N Datab ze je omezena na u it v konkr tn m syst mu pro kter byla vytvo ena S v jimkou rozsahu v slovn povolen ho z vazn mi pr vn mi p edpisy nap klad n rodn mi z kony zalo en mi na Evropsk sm rnici o software 91 250 a Sm rnici o Datab z ch 96 9 nesm te vyj mat nebo znovu pou vat podstatn sti obsahu Datab ze ani reprodukovat kop rovat upravovat p izp sobovat p ev d t rozeb rat roz le ovat obr cen konstruovat jakoukoli st Datab ze P ejete li si z skat informace o vz jemn provozuschopnosti interoperabilit jak je m n na v n rodn ch z konech zalo en ch na Evropsk sm rnici o software mus te d t spole nosti NAVTEO odpov daj c p le itost aby poskytla e en informace za p im en ch podm nek v etn n klad kter ur NAVTEO P EVOD LICENCE Datab zi nesm te p ev st na t et strany s v jimkou p padu kdy je instalov na v syst mu pro kter byla vytvo ena nebo kdy si neponech te dnou kopii Datab
49. eller Schweiz d r Ni anskaffade Databasen g lla I alla andra fall eller om den jurisdiktion d r Ni anskaffade Databasen inte kan best mmas skall nederl ndsk lag g lla Beh rig domstol p Er hemort vid tidpunkten d Ni anskaffade Databasen skall ha jurisdiktion ver tvist h rr rande fr n eller i samband med detta Avtal utan f rf ng f r NAVTEQs r ttigheter att framst lla krav p Er d till mpliga hemort Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 585 LISENSAVTALE FOR SLUTTBRUKERE VENNLIGST LES DENNE LISENSAVTALEN FOR SLUTTBRUKERE NOYE FOR DU TAR DATABASEN NAVTEQ I BRUK MERKNAD TIL BRUKEREN DETTE ER EN LISENSAVTALE OG IKKE EN AVTALE OM SALG MELLOM DEG OG NAVTEQ B V FOR DIN KOPI AV THE NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABASE INKLUDERT TILKNYTTET DATAPROGRAMVARE MEDIER OG FORKLARENDE TRYKT DOKUMENTASJON UTGITT AV NAVTEQ SAMLET KALT DATABASEN VED BRUKE DATABASEN GODTAR DU ALLE VILK RENE DENNE LISENSAVTALEN FOR SLUTTBRUKERE AVTALEN HVIS DU IKKE GODTAR VILK RENE DENNE AVTALEN M DU SNAREST SENDE DATABASEN OG ALLE ELEMENTER SOM FOLGER MED DEN TILBAKE TIL LEVERANDOREN FOR F DEN REFUNDERT EIERSKAP Databasen samt opphavsretter og ndelige eiendomsrettigheter eller underliggende rettigheter i disse tilh rer NAVTEQ eller deres rettighetsinnehavere Mediene Databasen ligger p forblir NAVTEQs og eller din leverandors eiendom inntil du har betalt hele belopet som tilfaller NAVTEQ og
50. entry 4pwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Music Catcher Operations Searching tracks Music Search You can search albums playlists to play narrowing by the following categories Albums The Album list of all the recorded albums is displayed You can select allthe albums or a desired album Artists You can narrow the listed album title by specifying the artist name Genres You can narrow the listed album title by specifying the genre and artist name Album Image The Album list with the assigned image is displayed You can select a desired album by looking the image Playlists The list of all the playlists registered is displayed You can select all the playlists or a desired playlist Displaying the Music Search screen 1 Touch the Search key The Music Search screen is displayed This screen can also be opened by touching Music Search key from the Destination menu screen 58 Music Search Albums Album Image Playlists SD Destination Music Search Telephone Please select a menu item 0 00 Note This operation is disabled while recording the first track of a CD or loading ejecting a disc Searching by Album 1 Touch the Albums key on the Music Search screen The Album list is displayed with the order of recorded date 2 Touch the desired Album key you wish to play back Selecting All Albums key specifies all the album data recorded in this system You can
51. get it back out of the DVD player or it may damage the DVD player Do not use discs that have large scratches are misshapen cracked etc Use of such discs may cause malfunction or damage To remove a disc from its storage case press down on the centre of the case and lift the disc out holding it carefully by the edges Do not use commercially available disc protection sheets or discs equipped with stabilizers etc These may damage the disc or cause breakdown of the internal mechanism MAX983HD 15 jenuew S I3umg Setting Ejecting a Disc Storage Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or any heat source Do not expose discs to excess humidity or dust Do not expose discs to direct heat from heaters Cleaning To remove finger marks and dust use a soft cloth and wipe in a straight line from the centre of the disc to the circumference Do not use any solvents such as commercially available cleaners anti static spray or thinner to clean discs After using special disc cleaner let the disc dry off well before playing it On Discs Exercise a good precaution when loading a disc The operation panel will close automatically when leaving it open for a while Never turn off the power and remove the unit from the car with a disc loaded 44 CAUTION For your safety the driver should not insert or eject a disc opening the operation panel while driving No Non Setting a disc 1
52. hrleistet vorbehaltlich der unten aufgef hrten Warnungen f r die Dauer von 12 Monaten ab dem Tag an dem Sie Ihre Kopie der Datenbank erworben haben dass die Datenbank im Wesentlichen in bereinstimmung mit den am Tag Ihres Erwerbes der Datenbank g ltigen Kriterien f r Genauigkeit und Vollst ndigkeit von NAVTEQ funktioniert diese werden auf Anfrage von NAVTEQ zur Verf gung gestellt Falls die Datenbank nicht entsprechend dieser beschr nkten Gew hrleistung funktioniert wird sich NAVTEQ angemessen darum bem hen Ihre mangelhafte Kopie der Datenbank zu reparieren oder zu ersetzen Sollten diese Bem hungen keine Verbesserung der Performance der Datenbank bewirken haben Sie die M glichkeit eine angemessene Erstattung des von Ihnen geleisteten Kaufpreises f r die Datenbank zu erhalten oder von diesem Vertrag zur ckzutreten Diese Pa nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD M glichkeiten stellen Ihr einziges Rechtsmittel gegen NAVTEQ dar Soweit in diesem Abschnitt nicht ausdr cklich anderweitig festgelegt macht NAVTEQ im Hinblick auf Richtigkeit Genauigkeit Zuverl ssigkeit oder in anderer Hinsicht keine weiteren Gew hrleistungen oder Zusicherungen bez glich der Nutzung der Ergebnisse die durch die Verwendung der Datenbank erzielt werden NAVTEQ gew hrleistet nicht dass die Datenbank ohne jeglichen Fehler ist oder sein wird Die vorstehende beschr nkte Gew hrleistung wird durch m ndliche oder schriftliche Informatio
53. is set to ON from the User menu in the Setting mode Turning the power off 1 Turn the ignition switch to OFF position Note Do not turn off the power while recording an audio CD or importing exporting deleting data The data processed may be broken Pewnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Opening the Operation Panel and Adjusting the Angle Open the operation panel when setting ejecting a disc or SD card The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted depending on the mounting angle of the unit or light coming into the car A CAUTION Do not move the operation panel forcibly or do not apply strong force to the operation panel When the operation panel is operating be careful not to get your hand or finger caught between the operation panel and main unit or its mechanical parts The driver should not operate the operation panel while driving Opening closing the operation panel 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button The operation panel will be opened or closed Note The operation panel will close automatically when leaving it open for a while When the operation panel is open the touch panel cannot be operated Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Adjusting the angle of the operation panel The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted in the range of 0 to 30 1 Keep pressing the OPEN CLOSE button more than 2 seconds Beeps will soun
54. list or drop the desired icon to the Trash icon to discard it or to the Folder icon to store it to the Favourite list 7 key Displayed only on the Frequent list screen Touching this key displays the following keys Delete Item Changes the Folder icon to the Trash icon You can discard the desired icon Sort by Date Changes the sorting method of the list to the order of the registered date 3 Back key Returns to the 3D List screen 9 1 QUEEN ELIZA CARLETON RODE Trash Folder In the Favourite list screen the Trash icon is displayed You can discard the desired icon by dragging and dropping it to the Trash icon In the Frequent list screen the Folder icon is displayed You can move the desired icon to the Favourite list by dragging and dropping it to the Folder icon G Registered name Place name Displays the registered name place name or facility name of the place which is selected apwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 8 Voice Command Operations This system has a built in voice recognition function You can perform fundamental operations by saying the corresponding voice commands Note The supported languages by the voice command function are English French German Italian Dutch and Spanish You can perform voice command operations after switching to a supported language For details of switching languages please see the Language sett
55. map is displayed Adjust The angle control keys are displayed You can raise the angle by touching the 4 key and lower the angle by touching the 4 key Speed Limit Icon Changes the function of the Speed Limit icon gt The icon blinks and a beep sounds when the speed limit information in the map database is changed The icon blinks when the speed limit information in the map database is changed OFF This function is disabled Hide Map key Hides the map and displays the screen containing only the next guidance point Turn by Turn screen This screen can also be displayed by keep pressing the MAP button When the navigation system is not in the route guidance mode the screen with the compass showing the direction is displayed A CAUTION The actual speed limit may change due to hours or other circumstances Be sure to observe the actual traffic circumstances and regulations at all times while driving When the actual speed exceeds the speed limit data the icon blinking and a beep sounding will not work Rp vnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Outline of Destination Entering Procedures To start route guidance operate the navigation system with the following procedure O Select the method of searching destination from the Destination menu screen then search for the desired destination Select a suitable searching method according to the place to sear
56. mode BAND button e Switches reception bands in Tuner TV Tuner modes disabled in Tuner mode when 2Zone ON buttons e Decreases or increases the volume in any mode disabled when 2Zone ON gt 11 button e Press to play or pause video and audio media in DVD Video iPod modes disabled in iPod mode when 2Zone ON Keep pressing more than 1 second to stop video playback in DVD Video mode ea gt gt buttons e Press to select the next lower or higher preset station in Tuner TV Tuner modes disabled in Tuner mode when 2Zone ON Keep pressing more than 1 second to seek down or up in Tuner TV Tuner modes disabled in Tuner mode when 2Zone ON Press to select the next lower or higher chapter number in DVD Video mode Press to select the next lower or higher track in CD MP3 WMA Music Catcher and iPod modes disabled when 2Zone ON Keep pressing to perform fast backward or fast forward playback in DVD Video CD MP3 WMA Music Catcher and iPod modes enabled only in DVD Video mode when 2Zone ON epwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 5 System Setting You can set various settings of this system from the Setting menu Setting menu screen 1 ae Setting General Navigation Screen Colour Auto Night Please select a menu item 0 00 General Settings Setting menu screen 2 ae Setting Back Stored Data Import Data Service Option E O Please
57. nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data any of which may lead to incorrect results The Database does not include or reflect information on inter alia neighborhood safety law enforcement emergency assistance construction work road or lane closures vehicle or speed restrictions road slope or grade bridge height weight or other limits road or traffic conditions special events traffic congestion or travel time GOVERNING LAW This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the jurisdiction in which you reside at the date of acquisition of the Database Should you at that moment reside outside the European Union or Switzerland the law of the jurisdiction within the European Union or Switzerland where you acquired the Database shall apply In all other cases or if the jurisdiction where you acquired the Database cannot be defined the laws of the Netherlands shall apply The courts competent at your place of residence at the time you acquired the Database shall have jurisdiction over any dispute arising out of or relating to this Agreement without prejudice to NAVTEQ right to bring claims at your then current place of residence Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 569 LIZENZVERTRAG F R ENDBENUTZER WICHTIG BITTE LESEN SIE DIESEN LIZENZVERTRAG F R ENDBENUTZER VOR DER VERWENDUNG DER NAVTEQ DATENBANK SORGF LTIG DURCH HINWEIS F R DEN BENUTZER DAS VORLIEGENDE DOKUMENT IST EIN LIZENZVERTRAG UND
58. not use the player for about one hour The condensation will disappear naturally allowing normal operation Driving on extremely bumpy roads which cause severe vibration may cause the sound to skip TV broadcast reception when the optional TV tuner is connected When receiving the TV broadcast the strength of the signals changes since the car is moving so in some cases it may not be possible to receive clear pictures TV signals are strongly linear so reception is affected by buildings mountains and other obstacles External factors such as electric train lines a high voltage lines and signal devices may disturb the picture or cause noise If the reception is poor switch to a station with good reception downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Notes on Handling About the hard disk drive Important Data saved to the hard disk drive may get lost in case of a breakdown malfunction or other trouble of this unit It is recommended that you back up your important data to a personal computer by using SD cards 1 Backing up User Data P 72 Never detach the hard disk drive by yourself In case data 1 stored on the hard disk drive gets erased or destroyed due to this action no repair covered by warranty can be granted Operation of this system may be limited to protect the hard disk drive if the temperature is extremely high or low In such a case please wait until temper
59. of the I lt and gt gt Search buttons Playlist information screen Playlist My Favourite Numbers Please select a menu item Skipping the current album playlist 1 Touch a Album or Playlist key during playback The tracks of the current album playlist are skipped and playback starts from the first track of the next or previous album playlist Artist Rihanna Feat Owane Hush Track information screen Track Dem Haters Selecting an album playlist or track from the List screen Get into 1 Touch the List Edit key Please select a menu item 0 00 The Album list screen or Playlist list screen is 3 Touch the Back key displayed 2 When the desired album playlist is not Scrolling titles i A vw Re touch the ol ae When a title or other information displayed on the screen is longer than the text area you can confirm the entire text by scrolling it 1 Displaying the text you wish to scroll touch 4 Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list and R touch the desired Track key key displayed at the right of the text The corresponding track is started playback Touch the Back key The text will scroll once 3 Touch the desired Album Playlist key The Track list screen appears Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 41 jenuew S I3umg Music Catcher Operations Editing album track information You can edit album track information from the information screens
60. performed manually Switching the CD Recording mode P 66 A WARNING Some CDs may be recorded at a higher volume level than desired Increase the volume gradually from the minimal setting after the playback has started Note While recording the CD no operation for the disc can be made unless cancelling the recording If you cancel recording you can restart the recording by the manual operation Recording tracks from a CD P 39 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals When an audio CD is already set 1 Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen 2 Touch the DVD CD key to select the Audio CD mode The system changes to the Audio CD mode and starts playback from the previous position jenuew saumo Audio CD mode screen Track list pane Album title P 02 Unfaithful 04 We Ride anna 05 Dem Haters 06 Final Goodbye 00 00 07 REC Information pane Track title Recording status AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen 204 we Ride MAX983HD 37 jenuew 5 12UMQ Audio CD Operations Audio CD operations Selecting a track to play This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Display the desired Track key on the Track list pane by touching the 4 or w key then touch the Track key to play back the track Playback of the specified track starts Torg a track searching Press the 1441 or gt g
61. play DVD Audio DVD RAM Video CDs Photo CDs etc Note It may not be possible to play back discs recorded on some CD DVD drive units Cause disc characteristics cracks dust dirt dust dirt on player s lens etc e If a CD R RW DVD R RW or DVD R RW disc that has not been finalised is played it will take a long time to start playing Also it may not be possible to play depending on its recording conditions You cannot play Super Audio CDs Playback of the CD player is not supported even if it is a hybrid disc Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals About MP3 WMA playback This unit can play back CD R RW DVD R RW and DVD R RW discs on which MP3 WMA music data have been recorded MP3 WMA Operations P 33 Note on region numbers The DVD video system assigns a region number to DVD video players and DVD discs by sales area The DVD video region number is marked on the disc jacket as shown below Notes on handling discs Handling New discs may have some roughness around the edges If such discs are used the player may not work or the sound may skip Use a ball point pen or the like to remove any roughness from the edge of the disc Ball point pen Roughness Never stick labels on the surface of the disc or mark the surface with a pencil or pen Never play a disc with any cellophane tape or other glue on it or with peeling off marks If you try to play such a disc you may not be able to
62. screen Touch the AUX key to select the AUX mode The screen of the connected visual device is displayed e The black screen is displayed when no visual device is connected Selecting the screen size You can change the displayed screen size to suit to the screen panel 1 2 Touch the screen to display the menu then touch the EE key Touch the Wide Cinema or Normal key to set the desired screen size e The factory default setting is Wide Wide The image is expanded so that the rectangle of the image fits to the screen The aspect ratio of the image may be changed Cinema The image is expanded so that the left and right edges of the image fit to the screen The top and bottom areas of the image may be cut off Normal The image is expanded so that the top and bottom edges of the image fit to the screen Changing the audio input level The input audio level of AUX terminal can be changed e The factory default setting is High 1 Touch the screen to display the menu then repeat touching the Sens key to select the level High 16 25 dB Mid 3 75 dB Low 0 dB gQpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD iPod Operations This unit can be used to control a connected Apple iPod for the information on the compatible models see the Clarion homepage http www clarion com Use the optional connector cable to connect the iPod Note The unit wi
63. se toti st t e naviga n syst m nezobraz spr vnou polohu vozidla nenavrhne nejkrat trasu nebo v s nedovede k po adovan mu c li V takov m p pad se spol hejte na vlastn sudek a zku enosti a p ihl ejte k aktu ln m podm nk m j zdy e Nepou vejte naviga n syst m k navr en trasy k nejbli nouzov slu b Datab ze toti neobsahuje kompletn seznam poskytovatel nouzov ch slu eb policie hasi nemocnic a zdravotnick ch za zen V t chto situac ch se id te vlastn m sudkem a p padn se zeptejte na cestu kolemjdouc ch Za bezpe nost na silnici nesete jako to idi v hradn odpov dnost Aby nedo lo k dopravn nehod nebo dopravn mu p estupku m jte v dy na pam ti Ze p ed informacemi ulo en mi v naviga n m syst mu maj v dy p ednost aktu ln podm nky na silnic ch a dopravn p edpisy Z d vodu zastar n datab ze zm ny okolnost nebo povahy zdroj dat m e software tak obsahovat nep esn nebo ne pln informace Sledujte proto po celou dobu j zdy aktu ln dopravn podm nky a dopravn zna en a dodr ujte dopravn p edpisy Naviga n syst m neobsahuje ani dn m zp sobem nenahrazuje informace o dopravn ch p edpisech specifikac ch vozidla v etn v hy v ky ky a n kladu a nebo omezen ch rychlosti podm nk ch na silnic ch v etn sklonu stoup n a stavu vozovky informace o p ek k c
64. select a menu item Press the Set button The Setting menu screen is displayed Touching the gt Next key displays the additional Setting menu screen Touch the desired menu item For the operation procedure hereinafter see the explanation of each section Note For details about the Screen Colour item see Setting the Screen Colour mode P 67 When you touch the General key from the Setting menu you can set various settings concerning the general features Language setting You can change the language used by the system As for English you can also select the unit of distance km mile Language You can select the language from the following language keys English mile key English km key Francais key Deutsch key Espafiol key Italiano key Nederlands key Portugu s key Svenska key Dansk key Note For the languages other than English distances are displayed using the metric system Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Clock settings You can set various settings concerning the clock 1 2 Touch the Setting key of the Clock item The Clock menu screen is displayed Touch the desired menu item to set On Screen Clock Shows hides the clock display on the screen Clock Format Changes the clock format to 12 hour 24 hour system Daylight Saving Time Selects whether to apply the
65. select a street Zpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Outline of Destination Entering Procedures 11 Touch the House No key The house number input screen is displayed AS Address Country UNITED KINGDOM City LONDON Street ABBEY ROAD KILBURN LONDON House No Please select a menu item Note You can omit the house number entry By touching the OK key proceed to step 13 12 Enter the house number by touching numbers on the screen then touch the OK key The Set Location menu is displayed The place found is shown with gg on the map House No Skip All Clear OK O Please enter a house number Note The range of house numbers you can enter is displayed at the bottom of the screen 13 Confirm the location then touch the OK key The Set Route menu is displayed with the map around the place selected A Set Location OK Note With this screen you can register the place found or can search facilities POI around the place Set Location menu P 28 14 Touch the Start key The route guidance will be started Er Set Route Start More Routes Route Info Add Way Pt P 2 44 295km Note In this screen you can also select among other suggested routes with a different routing priority condition obtain additional route information and set waypoints Set Route menu P 28 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals
66. significato attribuito dalla legge nazionale basata sulla Direttiva Comunitaria sul software Lei dovr offrire alla NAVTEQ una opportunit ragionevole di fornirle tali informazioni a condizioni ragionevoli inclusi i costi quali determinate da NAVTEQ CESSIONE DELLA LICENZA Le fatto divieto di trasferire il Database a terzi tranne nel caso in cui esso sia installato nel sistema per il quale stato creato o quando Lei non abbia trattenuto alcuna altra copia del Database e a condizione che il cessionario accetti tutte le clausole e le condizioni di questo contratto e lo confermi per iscritto a NAVTEQ set di CD possono essere venduti o ceduti esclusivamente come set completi e come forniti da NAVTEQ I CD che li compongono non possono essere venduti separatamente GARANZIA LIMITATA NAVTEQ garantisce che salvo quanto stabilito nell avvertenza di cui in calce per un periodo di dodici mesi dalla data di acquisto della Sua copia del Database le prestazioni dello stesso saranno conformi ai criteri di accuratezza e completezza di NAVTEQ in vigore alla data in cui Lei ha acquistato il Database questi criteri Le saranno messi a disposizione da NAVTEQ a Sua richiesta Se le prestazioni del Database non corrispondono a questa garanzia limitata NAVTEQ far ogni ragionevole sforzo per prestazione del Database in conformit alle garanzie qui assunte Lei avr l opzione tra ricevere una restituzione ragionevole del prezzo pagato per il Datab
67. spent battery properly Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 61 jenuew s 1aumg Remote Control Operations Functions of the Buttons When the 2Zone function is ON the controls work upon the Rear zone only AUDIO button Press to set the Audio language in DVD Video mode SUB TITLE button Press to display subtitles in DVD Video mode ANGLE button Press to set the Angle function of the DVD video when the Angle mark is displayed in DVD Video mode Available only when the Angle function on the DVD Setup menu is set to ON TOP MENU button Press to display the Top Menu screen stored on DVD video disc Some discs are not displayed the top menu screen in DVD Video mode MENU button Press to display the Menu screen stored on DVD video disc in DVD Video mode ENT button Press to fix the selected button item on the Menu screen of a DVD video in DVD Video mode A V 4 gt buttons Press to select button items displayed on the Menu screen of a DVD video in DVD Video mode SOURCE button Press to switch the source modes such as FM AM mode DVD CD mode etc in any mode only DVD Video TV Tuner and AUX modes are selectable when 2Zone ON RETURN button e Press to switch to the previous screen while the Menu screen of a DVD video is being displayed However it may occur that this button operation dose not work on some discs in DVD Video
68. the direction of lower frequencies j 7 When the DX Seek tuning starts DX Seek Search buttons instead of the P ch keys appears on the Information pane g LO Seek Manual memory If you keep touching the v or A key more 1 Select the desired band by touching the than 1 second the Local Seek tuning is Band key carried out 2 Select the desired station with the seek The broadcast stations with good reception tuning manual tuning or preset tuning sensitivity are automatically selected 3 Touch and hold one of the Preset key for more e When the Local Seek tuning starts LO than 2 seconds to store the current station into Seek appears on the screen the preset memory Manual tuning There are 2 ways available Quick tuning and step tuning When you are in the step tuning mode the frequency changes one step at a time In quick tuning mode you can quickly tune the desired frequency 1 Select the desired band by touching the Band key 2 Touch and hold the Band key for more than 1 second to switch to the manual tuning mode Manual appears on the screen and the manual tuning is now available 3 Tune into a station Quick tuning Touch and hold the A or v key for more than 1 second to tune in a station Step tuning Touch the A or v key to manually tune in a station Recalling a preset station There are total of 24 preset positions 6 FM1 6 FM2 6 AS 6 AM to store individual radio stations
69. the guidelines by the procedure previously described 2 Touch the Setting key The four control point appears on the guidelines and the control keys appear at the bottom of the screen 160 40 3 Select the control point you wish to adjust the position by touching it then move the control point by using the 4 4 or gt key y 1 lt gt Touching these keys moves the selected control point by 1 dot Touching and holding these keys moves the selected control point by 5 dots Camera Hides displays the camera image Grid Displays hides the grid on the screen 4 When the adjustment completes touch the Back key to quit the adjustment mode MAX983HD 59 Jenuew s 1au jenuew S I3umg Rear Monitor Operations By installing the optional rear monitor in this system the rear passengers can enjoy visual sources played on the main unit this unit Moreover they can enjoy the visual sources different from the media sources played on the main unit by using the 2Zone function 2Zone Function P 19 Note When 2Zone function is turned on use the optional infrared headphone systems to listen to the Rear zone sound Media sources displayed on the rear monitor The following media sources played on the main unit can be displayed on the rear monitor DVD video TV Tuner e AUX Operations on the rear monitor Note See also the operation manual
70. the warnings set out below for a period of 12 months after acquisition of your copy of the Database it will perform substantially in accordance with NAVTEQ s Criteria for Accuracy and Completeness existing on the date you acquired the Database these criteria are available from NAVTEQ at your request If the Database does not perform in accordance with this limited warranty NAVTEGQ will use reasonable efforts to repair or replace your non conforming copy of the Database If these efforts do not lead to performance of the Database in accordance with the warranties set out herein you will have the option to either receive a reasonable refund of the price you paid for the Database or to rescind this Agreement This shall be NAVTEQ s entire liability and your sole remedy against NAVTEQ Except as expressly provided in this section NAVTEQ does not warrant nor make any representations regarding the use of results of the use of the Database in terms of its correctness Stay nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD accuracy reliability or otherwise NAVTEQ does not warrant that the Database is or will be error free No oral or written information or advice provided by NAVTEQ your supplier or any other person shall create a warranty or in any way increase the scope of the limited warranty described above The limited warranty set forth in this Agreement does not affect or prejudice any statutory legal rights that you may have under the lega
71. to the previous screen Lower Displays lower case characters input keyboard Upper Displays upper case characters input keyboard All Clear Deletes all characters entered so far Apwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Music Catcher Operations A Z Displays the alphabetic input keyboard Accent Displays the accent characters input keyboard 0 9 Displays the number input keyboard Symbols Displays the symbol characters input keyboard OK Fixes the entered characters and proceed to the Add Track screen Touch the Album Artist or Genre key to specify the search category select an album by the similar operation as the Music Search function The Add Track list screen is displayed Touch the desired Track keys you wish to add to the playlist then touch the Add key The specified tracks are added to the playlist and the display returns to the Add Track screen e Touching the OK key adds the specified tracks and completes creating the Playlist Repeatthe operation of step 5 and 6 to add all the tracks you wish to be included in the playlist When adding tracks is completed touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Editing a Playlist You can edit the playlist from the information screens gt Displaying information registered for the album playlist track P 41 1 2 Select the playlist you wish to edit informat
72. touched position and keep touching the map to scroll the map towards the touched direction For the 3D map touch the upper part of the map to scroll the map toward the touched direction and touch the left or right part to rotate the map while touching 2D Map L iny Str o Ka Pe rsan Street i Back key Returns to the current location map screen OK key You can set the location under the cursor as the destination or store the location to the Address Book Location menu Menu on scrolled map P 9 Displaying the map of the current car location When the MAP button is pressed the map around the current location is displayed with the vehicle in the centre of it When the vehicle runs the behaviour is the same Zooming IN OUT the map Press the OUT Zoom Out or IN Zomm In button to change the map scale The 2D map can be adjusted in 11 steps and the 3D map in 10 steps IN Zoom In button Increases the map scale and shows a more detailed map Keep touching it to enter the Free Zoom mode OUT Zoom Out button Decreases the map scale and shows the map of a wider area Keep touching it to enter the Free Zoom mode Note For the 2D 2D or 2D 3D map these buttons work upon the right map To adjust the left map touch the left map and then use these buttons Changing the map appearance The Map screen can be adjusted regarding orientation or appearance of the map
73. ven om NAVTEQ har underr ttats om m jligheten av s dana skador NAVTEOs ansvar f r direkta skador r i samtliga fall begr nsat till priset f r Ert exemplar av Databasen DEN BEGR NSADE GARANTIN OCH ANSVARSBEGR NSNINGEN ENLIGT DETTA AVTAL P VERKAR ELLER BEGR NSAR INTE ERA LAGSTADGADE R TTIGHETER OM NI HAR ANSKAFFAT DATABASEN ANNORLEDES AN VID UT VANDE AV F RETAGSVERKSAMHET VARNING Databasen terger verkligheten s som den existerade innan Ni erh ll Databasen och den inneh ller data och information fr n myndigheter och andra k llor vilka kan inneh lla fel och utel mnanden F ljaktligen kan Databasen inneh lla oriktig och ofullst ndig information p grund av tidens g ng f r ndrade omst ndigheter och beroende p beskaffenheten hos de anv nda k llorna Databasen inkluderar eller terger inte information om bland annat traktens s kerhet uppr tth llande av lag och ordning hj lp i n dsituationer byggnadsarbeten v g eller gatuavst ngningar fordons eller hastighetsbegr nsningar v glutning eller grad broh jd vikt eller andra begr nsningar v g eller trafikf rh llanden s rskilda evenemang trafikstockning eller restid G LLANDE LAG Detta Avtal skall lyda under lagarna i den jurisdiktion i vilken Ni r bosatt vid det datum d Ni anskaffade Databasen Skulle Ni vid denna tidpunkt vara bosatt utanf r den Europeiska Unionen eller Schweiz skall lagen i den jurisdiktion inom den Europeiska Unionen
74. ze a za p edpokladu e nabyvatel souhlas se v emi podm nkami t to Smlouvy a potvrd to p semn spole nosti NAVTEQ Soubory o v ce disc ch mohou b t p ev d ny nebo prod v ny pouze jako pln soubor jak jej dodal NAVTEG a nikoli jako jejich d l soubor OMEZEN Z RUKA Spole nost NAVTEO zaru uje e s v hradou Varov n uveden ch n e po obdob 12 m s c po nabyt Va kopie Datab ze bude tato fungovat podstatn v souladu s Krit rii spole nosti NAVTEQ pro p esnost a plnost existuj c ch k datu kdy jste Datab zi nabyli tato krit ria m ete na svou dost od NAVTEO z skat Nefunguje li Datab ze v souladu s touto omezenou z rukou spole nost NAVTEQ vynalo p im ren sil k oprav nebo v m n Va nevyhovuj c kopie Datab ze Nepovede li toto sil k fungov n Datab ze v souladu se z rukami zde uveden mi budete m t mo nost bud obdr et p im enou n hradu ceny kterou jste zaplatili za Datab zi nebo odstoupit od t to Smlouvy Toto je pln odpovednost spolecnosti NAVTEO a V jedin opravn prostredek proti NAVTEO S v jimkou toho co je v slovn stanoveno v tomto odd le spole nost NAVTEO nezaru uje ani ne in dn prohl en ohledn u it v sledk u v n Datab ze co do spr vnosti p esnosti spolehlivosti nebo jinak Spole nost NAVTEO nezaru uje e Datab ze je nebo bude bez chyb dn stn nebo p semn informac
75. zone and perform operations for the source mode 4 Touch the Rear key to switch to the Rear zone and touch the same Source key previously selected output from the speakers of the vehicle side and those of the Rear zone are from the optional infrared headphone systems Controlling a source assigned to the Rear zone can be made by using the optional remote control unit To control it from this unit once assign the same source to the Front zone then 5 Touch the Front key to switch to the Front control it zone and touch the desired Source key you Note wish to assign for the Front zone When a voice interrupt of the navigation system 6 To turn the 2Zone function off press the arises during the 2Zone function is turned on the SRC Source button and touch the 2Zone sound of the Front zone is muted and the sound of key the Rear zone is output normally When it arises during the 2Zone function is turned off the audio signals to the 4ch speakers are attenuated and the voice from the navigation system is output from the front two speakers You cannot operate the 2Zone function during the voice interrupt of the navigation system When the same source is assigned for Front and Rear zone operations in a zone are also applied for another zone The 2Zone function is disabled when the Telephone mode is selected When a telephone interrupt arises while the 2Zone function is turned on the 2Zone function is automatically
76. 1 ACORDO DE LICENCA DO UTILIZADOR FINAL QUEIRA POR FAVOR LER ATENTAMENTE ESTE ACORDO DE LICENCA DO UTILIZADOR FINAL ANTES DE UTILIZAR A BASE DE DADOS NAVTEQ AVISO PARA O UTILIZADOR N W O PRESENTE DOCUMENTO E UM ACORDO DE CONCESSAO DE LICENCA E NAO UM ACORDO PARA EFEITOS DE VENDA ENTRE O UTILIZADOR E A NAVTEO B V NO OUE RESPEITA A COPIA ADQUIRIDA DA BASE DE DADOS DE NAVEGAGAO E CARTOGRAFIA DA NAVTEQ INCLUINDO O PROGRAMA DE COMPUTADOR E O MEIO DE SUPORTE QUE LHE ESTAO ASSOCIADOS BEM COMO A DOCUMENTACAO EXPLICATIVA PUBLICADA PELA NAVTEO CONJUNTAMENTE DESIGNADOS POR A BASE DE DADOS AO UTILIZAR A BASE DE DADOS EM QUALQUER CIRSCUNSTANCIA O CLIENTE ESTARA A MANIFESTAR A SUA ACEITACAO E CONCORDANCIA RELATIVAMENTE A TODOS OS TERMOS E CONDICOES DO PRESENTE ACORDO DE LICEN A DO UTILIZADOR FINAL DORAVANTE DESIGNADO POR ACORDO CASO NAO CONCORDE COM OS TERMOS CONSTANTES DESTE ACORDO OUEIRA DE IMEDIATO EFECTUAR A DEVOLUCAO DA BASE DE DADOS JUNTAMENTE COM TODOS OS OUTROS ARTIGOS OUE A ACOMPANHAM AO SEU FORNECEDOR PARA QUE SE PROCEDA AO REEMBOLSO PROPRIEDADE A Base de Dados assim como os direitos de autor e de propriedade intelectual ou os direitos conexos sobre a mesma s o propriedade da NAVTEQ ou dos seus licenciantes A propriedade dos meios de suporte que cont amp m a Base de Dados 6 retida pela NAVTEQ e ou pelo seu fornecedor at que tenham sido pagas na sua totalidade guaisguer quantias devidas NAVTEQ e ou ao
77. 1 Touch the Album Image key on the Music Search screen The Album Image list is displayed Touch the desired Album key you wish to play back e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list Searching by Playlist 1 2 Touch the desired Playlist key you wish to play back Selecting All Playlists key specifies all the playlists created in this system You can change the Playlist to play by the Playlist skip operation Touching the by Name key sorts the list by the alphanumerical order of the playlist name In this list touching the alphabet key displayed at the right of the screen scrolls the list to the first item of which the initial character of the playlist name matches to the specified key character Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list Creating a Playlist You can create a playlist collecting your favourite numbers 1 Touch the Search key to display the Music Search screen 2 Touch the Playlists key to display the Playlist list 3 Touch the New key The name entry screen is displayed 4 Enter the playlist name by touching the Touch the Playlists key on the Music Search screen The Playlist list is displayed with the order of created date characters on the screen then touch the OK key The Add Track screen is displayed Lower A Z Accent 0 9 Symbols O New playlist is made Please enter a name 9 Deletes the last entered character Back Returns
78. 4 Latitude longitude information Displays the latitude longitude information of the location under the cursor Whether this is displayed or not can be set Map Scrolling Information P 47 G Location information When moving the cursor on a Stored Location destination or waypoint the place name will be displayed If the TMC icon is put together to the cursor the TMC information is displayed Pewnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Map Screen Features Indicators displayed during the route guidance mode After a destination is set and travelling is started the guidance route and various guidance information are displayed on the map gt Route Guidance Screen Features P 30 320m SOUTHWARK BRIDG Small Turn by Turn Arrow display Displays the turning direction and distance to the next guidance point Whether it is displayed or not can be set Map Guidance Settings P 44 Expected arrival time and distance to the destination The expected time of arrival to the destination and the distance from the current location to the destination are displayed The remaining time and distance to the next waypoint are displayed additionally if at least one waypoint is existing Guidance route The guidance route to the destination is displayed The colour of the route can be changed Route Colour P 45 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Destination directio
79. 7 LONDON pee W CROWN GAT AB BUSINES FUJI SAN SW Favourite Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 7 Menu Types and Operation Navi Shortcut menu Touching the NAVI key from the Current Location Map screen displays the Navi Shortcut menu on top ofthe Map screen Operate by touching the desired menu items or icons pane rt LIE M N ler NK ames s parllorse Gert l Dest Route Quick POI 3 2 key Quick POI key Displays the Favourite list menu screen Displays the Quick POI screen for searching nearby POI or POI on the route with five Dest key categories You can customise the categories by touching the Setting key on the Quick POI screen The five categories can also be Displays the Destination menu screen of the navigation system Route key customised from the Setting menu Quick Displays the Route menu screen POI Settings P 46 key Repeats the current voice guidance 29 key Hides the Navi Shortcut menu gownloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Menu Types and Operation Location menu Menu on scrolled map After scrolling the map by touching the Map screen touch the OK key on the screen to display the Location menu at the left side of the screen You can set the location under the cursor at the centre of the screen as the destination or store it to the Address Book B
80. A Operations This system can play MP3 WMA data recorded on a disc or saved in an SD card About the MP3 WMA files What is MP3 WMA MP3 and WMA are the audio compression methods which have penetrated into PC users and become a standard format MP3 is an audio compression method and classified into audio layer 3 of MPEG standards WMA is an audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation These features compress the original audio data to about 10 percent of its initial size with a high sound quality This means that about 10 music CDs can be recorded on a CD R RW disc to allow a long listening time without having to change CDs Displaying MP3 WMA Tag titles Tag information such as title artist and album title can be displayed for an MP3 WMA file containing the Tag information Note This system does not completely support the ID3 version 2 x tag format These tags may not be displayed Precautions on the MP3 MWA data Files other than MP3 WMA data cannot be played In addition some files may not be played because of the encoding format When a file cannot be played the next file is played instead Some noise may occur depending on the type of encoder software used to encode the data You can apply the VBR variable bit rate format when encoding but setting the value of VBR to within ranges from 32 kbps to 320 kbps is recommended In case of data recorded in VBR the displayed play time may be slightly
81. A data is stored to the SD card slot gt Setting Ejecting an SD Card P 17 2 Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen 3 Touch the SD Card key to select the SD Card mode The system changes to the SD Card mode MP3 WMA mode and starts playback after a while WARNING Some tracks may be recorded at a higher volume level than desired Increase the volume gradually from the minimal setting after the playback has started Note When the operation panel is opened while playing back music data in the SD card the playback will be stopped and the Stop message will appear in the display MP3 WMA mode screen Folder name Track list pane 02 Hands Clean 58 so card F Under Rug Swept 04 Precious Illusions 05 AMan 00 00 45 Option 0 00 Information pane File type AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen 03 Flinch MP3 WMA operations Selecting a track to play e This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Display the desired Track key on the Track list pane by touching the 4 or w key touch the Track key to play back the track Playback of the specified track starts Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD MP3 WMA Operations KI a track searching Press the ke or gt gt Search button during playback Tracks are skipped as many as the times pressing the button and playback star
82. ANS LE PRESENT CONTRAT SONT SANS PREJUDICE DE VOS DROITS SI VOUS AVEZ ACQUIS LA BASE DE DONNEES DANS UN CADRE AUTRE QUE PROFESSIONNEL AVERTISSEMENTS La Base de donn es refl te la r alit telle qu elle existait avant que vous ne receviez la Base de donn es Elle contient des donn es et informations provenant de services publics administratifs et d autres sources qui peuvent contenir des erreurs ou des omissions Par cons quent la Base de donn es peut contenir des informations rendues incompl tes ou inexactes au cours du temps ou en raison des circonstances et de la nature des sources utilis es La Base de donn es ne contient ou ne refl te aucune information sur notamment la s curit du voisinage la proximit de services de police ou d assistance d urgence les travaux de construction la fermeture de routes ou de voies de circulation les limitations de vitesse et autres restrictions concernant les automobiles la d clivit ou le degr d inclinaison des routes les limitations de hauteur de poids ou autres restrictions concernant les ponts les conditions de circulation routi re les v nements particuliers les embouteillages routiers ou les dur es de voyage LOI APPLICABLE Ce contrat est r gi par le droit du pays dans lequel vous r sidez lors de l acquisition de la Base de donn es Si ce moment vous r sidez en dehors de l Union europ enne ou de la Suisse le droit applicable sera celui en vigueur dans le pays
83. AVTEQ en NAVTEG sur votre demande Si la Base de donn es ne fonctionne pas conform ment cette garantie limit e NAVTEQ s efforcera dans une limite raisonnable de r parer ou de remplacer votre copie non conforme de la Base de donn es Si ces efforts ne permettent pas d obtenir que la Base de donn es fonctionne conform ment aux garanties pr vues aux pr sentes vous aurez la possibilit soit d obtenir un remboursement raisonnable du prix que vous avez pay pour la Base de donn es soit de r silier le pr sent Contrat Ceci constitue le seul engagement de responsabilit de NAVTEO et votre seul recours encontre de NAVTEQ A l exception des dispositions expresses du pr sent paragraphe NAVTEQ ne pynloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD donne aucune garantie et ne fait aucune d claration concernant Putilisation ou les r sultats de l utilisation de la Base de donn es en ce qui concerne son exactitude sa pr cision sa fiabilit ou toute autre qualit NAVTEQ ne garantit pas que la Base de donn es est ou sera exempte de toute erreur Aucune information ou conseil oral ou crit fournis par NAVTEQ votre fournisseur ou une quelconque autre personne ne saurait constituer une garantie ni engager NAVTEQ ou accro tre le champ de la garantie limit e d crite ci dessus La garantie limit e pr vue dans le pr sent Contrat est sans pr judice des droits dont vous pouvez b n ficier en vertu de la garantie l gale cont
84. Album list 3D List screen Jewels Very Best Of Queen Back White Lilie Eye to the Te NA Under My Ski Jewels Very EI lt gt Switching Angle 1 Touch the az key to switch the viewing angle of the list The 2D List screen is displayed Back Genuine g White Lilies Isla Buena Vista Social Y C Eye to the Telescope Counting Under My Skin 8n J Jewels Very B Playing back albums 1 Touch the desired Album key you wish to play The source mode is changed to the Music Catcher mode then playback starts from the first track of the specified album Touch the lt lt or gt gt key on the quarter circle to scroll the list of the 3D List screen Are wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 4 Operations of Accessories TV Tuner Operations About the TV tuner Watching TV requires a TV tuner When an optional TV tuner is connected through the CeNET cable this unit controls all TV tuner functions About the VTR input terminal The TV tuner has a VTR input terminal to which 1 external device can be connected Connect a 12V video cassette player VCP or video cassette recorder VCR to the TV tuner input terminal Changing the TV tuner to the VTR mode you can display the VTR data on the monitor of this unit Selecting the TV Tuner mode 1 Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen 58 Source Back FM AM DV
85. Be careful to handle the unit during navigating or immediately after turning the power off Turn off the power of the vehicle when connecting or disconnecting wires Doing this while the power of the vehicle is turned on may cause a trouble or malfunction This unit uses a precision mechanism Even in the event that trouble arises never open the case disassemble the unit or lubricate the rotating parts Note When using this unit first time after purchasing or not used for long periods of time it might take about 5 to 15 minutes until the current location is determined using GPS Moreover even when using it often it may take about 2 to 3 minutes until the current location is determined according to the GPS measuring situation For vehicles equipped with an intelligent key do not bring the intelligent key close to this unit This system may not operate correctly If electrical equipment that generates a strong electrical noise is used near this unit the screen may be disturbed and noise may be generated In this case keep away such electrical equipment or refrain from using it When the inside of the car is very cold and the player is used soon after switching on the heater moisture may form on the disc DVD CD or the optical parts ofthe player and proper playback may not be possible If moisture forms on the disc DVD CD wipe it off with a soft cloth If moisture forms on the optical parts of the player do
86. Clarion Owner s manual Navigation Mode d emploi Navigation Benutzerhandbuch Navigation Manuale dell utente Navigazione Gebruikershandleiding Navigatie Gu a de usuario Navegaci n garhandbok Navigation Manual do utilizador Navegac o Brugervejledning Navigation MAX983HD HDD NAVIGATION SYSTEM SYSTEME DE NAVIGATION HDD HDD NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM SISTEMA DI NAVIGAZIONE HDD HDD NAVIGATIESYSTEEM SISTEMA DE NAVEGACI N HDD NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM MED H RDDISK SISTEMA DE NAVEGAC O COM HDD UNIDADE DE DISCO R GIDO HDD NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Safety Precautions When using this navigation system follow the precautions listed below After reading this manual be sure to keep it in a handy place such as the glove box of your car AWarnings This navigation system should not be used as a substitute for your own judgment Any route suggestions made by this navigation system may never override any local traffic regulations your own judgment and or knowledge of safe driving practices Disregard route suggestions by the navigation system if such suggestions would cause you to perform a hazardous or illegal maneuver place you in a hazardous situation or route you into an area you consider unsafe The advice provided by the navigation system is to be regarded only as a suggestion s There may be situations where the navigation system displays the vehicle s location in
87. D CD Music SD Card Catcher Telephone 2Zone Please select a source 2 Touch the TV key to select the TV Tuner mode The system changes to the TV Tuner mode and the TV screen is displayed A WARNING For your safety the driver should not watch the TV or operate the controls while driving Please note that watching and operating the TV while driving are prohibited by law in some countries Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals TV Tuner mode screen Touching the TV screen displays the following TV Tuner mode screen jenuew saumo Preset key pane EA Television Pitch P470ch P2 Ach P5 10ch Close ps AS Seek st Option 0 00 Channel No Information pane Band e If you do not operate the menu for 5 seconds the TV Tuner mode screen will automatically be hidden and it returns to the playback screen e To close the TV Tuner mode screen within 5 seconds touch the Close key AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen MAX983HD 47 jenuew s 19UMQ TV Tuner Operations Basic operations Watching TV Note For your safety this system has a safety function which turns off the picture when the car is moving so only the audio can be heard The picture can only be watched when the car is stopped and the parking brake is applied Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen Touch the Band key to select the desired TV band TV1 or TV2 Every touc
88. ERS EN BIJBEHOREND SCHRIFTELIJK MATERIAAL TER UITLEG ZOALS DIT DOOR NAVTEQ WORDT UITGEGEVEN TEZAMEN DE DATABASE DOOR HET GEBRUIK VAN UW EXEMPLAAR VAN DE DATABASE STEMT U INMET ALLE BEPALINGEN VAN DEZE GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST OVEREENKOMST INDIEN U NIET INSTEMT MET DE BEPALINGEN VAN DEZE OVEREENKOMST DIENT U UW EXEMPLAAR VAN DE DATABASE ONMIDDELLIJK TE RETOURNEREN AAN UW LEVERANCIER TEGEN RESTITUTIE VAN DE LICENTIEVERGOEDING EIGENDOM U erkent dat de Database alsmede de auteursrechten en intellectuele eigendom naburige rechten of soortgelijke rechten daarop berusten bij NAVTEQ of haar licentieverleners De eigendom van de fysieke dragers waarop de Database is vastgelegd berust bij NAVTEQ en of uw leverancier tot het moment dat u de volledige vergoeding aan NAVTEQ of uw leverancier hebt betaald die u bent verschuldigd uit hoofde van deze Overeenkomst of vergelijkbare overeenkomst en op basis waarvan u zaken hebt ontvangen VERLENING VAN HET GEBRUIKSRECHT NAVTEQ verleent u een niet exclusief recht tot gebruik van de Database voor uw eigen gebruik of indien van toepassing voor intern gebruik binnen uw bedrijf Het is u niet toegestaan ter zake van het aan u verleende gebruiksrecht sublicenties te verlenen BEPERKINGEN OP HET GEBRUIK De Database is uitsluitend bedoeld voor gebruik op het specifieke systeem waarvoor de Database ontwikkeld is Behoudens voor zover uitdrukkelijk toegestaan op grond van dwingendrechtelijke wetgev
89. HDD 4 500 Albums lt Remalning time 250 42 00 gt Please select a menu item Touch the desired key you wish to perform All Tracks Start recording of all the tracks in the CD Current Track Start recording of the track currently played back Selected Tracks The Select Track screen is displayed Touch the desired Track keys you wish to record then touch the OK key to start recording of the specified track MAX983HD 39 jenuew S I3umg Music Catcher Operations What is the Music Catcher The audio data recorded from the audio CDs are stored in the Music Catcher By selecting the Music Catcher mode you can manage the great number of recorded audio data efficiently and can play back these data Recordable number of albums or tracks Up to 500 albums can be recorded Up to 99 tracks can be included in an album Up to 4000 tracks can be recorded Up to 16 GB HDD space can be used for audio data About the Music Search function You can search the audio data to be played back narrowing by the Album title Artist name Genre Album image and or Playlist title selected from the list screens About the Playlist Playlist is a list of tracks to be played back You can create a playlist collecting your favourite numbers You can create up to 100 playlists Up to 99 tracks can be listed in a playlist selecting the tracks at random Selecting the Music Catcher mode 1 Press the SRC
90. KEIN KAUFVERTRAG ZWISCHEN IHNEN UND NAVTEQ B V F R IHRE KOPIE DER NAVIGATIONSKARTENDATENBANK VON NAVTEQ EINSCHLIESSLICH ZUGEHORIGER COMPUTERSOFTWARE MEDIEN UND VON NAVTEQ HERAUSGEGEBENER SCHRIFTLICHER UNTERLAGEN ZUR ERL UTERUNG GEMEINSAM DIE DATENBANK MIT DER VERWENDUNG DER DATENBANK ERKL REN SIE SICH MIT ALLEN BESTIMMUNGEN DIESES LIZENZVERTRAGES F R ENDBENUTZER VERTRAG EINVERSTANDEN FALLS SIE MIT DEN BESTIMMUNGEN DIESES VERTRAGES NICHT EINVERSTANDEN SIND GEBEN SIE DIE DATENBANK MIT ALLEN ZUGEH RIGEN MATERIALIEN GEGEN R CKERSTATTUNG DES KAUFPREISES BITTE AN IHREN H NDLER ZUR CK EIGENTUMSRECHT Die Datenbank sowie s mtliche Urheberrechte geistige Eigentumsrechte oder verwandte Schutzrechte an der Datenbank stehen im Eigentum von NAVTEQ oder deren Lizenzgebern Das Eigentumsrecht an den Medien auf denen sich die Datenbank befindet verbleibt bei NAVTEQ und oder Ihrem H ndler bis Sie alle Forderungen beglichen haben die Sie NAVTEQ und oder Ihrem H ndler entsprechend diesem Vertrag oder hnlichen Vertr gen unter denen Ihnen Waren bereitgestellt werden schulden LIZENZGEW HRUNG NAVTEQ gew hrt Ihnen eine nicht exklusive Lizenz die Datenbank zur pers nlichen Verwendung oder soweit anwendbar zur internen Verwendung in Ihrem Unternehmen einzusetzen Die vorliegende Lizenz berechtigt nicht zur Vergabe von Unterlizenzen NUTZUNGSBESCHR NKUNGEN Die Verwendung der Datenbank ist nur in dem spezifischen System gestattet
91. MAX983HD 2 1 3 Entering the Destination Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu You can search for a destination from the Destination menu by using various methods Use a suitable searching method according to the place you wish to go to Destination menu screen 1 Destination Cancel Route Address Address Book Points of Interest Nearby POI Home gt Add New SD Destination Music Search Telephone Please select a menu item 0 00 Destination menu screen 2 Destination Previous Previous Postcode Destinations Starting Point M way Intersection Stored Routes Entrance Exit Extra POI Please select a menu item 1 Press the MENU button The Destination menu screen is displayed Touching the gt Next key displays the next menu screen Note You can also display the Destination menu screen by touching the Dest key from the Navi Shortcut menu which is displayed by touching the NAVI key on the Map screen 2 Touch the desired searching method For the operation procedure hereafter see the explanation of each section 25 di dad MAX983HD Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu By Address Forthe operation procedure using the Address see Setting destination by entering the address P 19 By Address Book Specifies a place registered in the navigation system as the destination Note To use this function register places beforeh
92. MC Provider screen Select Automatic The menu screen is not displayed Certain keys functions are not available for your safety during driving Menu is displayed again when the vehicle is stopped in a safe place Too many landmark icons are displayed on the map Error Messages Error Message According to system settings many landmark icons are displayed according to the current location Cause You can set the system not to display landmark icons Landmark Icon display P 45 Remedy SD Card ACCESS ERROR Memory Card access failed The SD card is not set correctly Set the SD card again The SD card is not recognised Set another SD card Hard Disk Drive HIGH TEMP ERROR Please wait until the temperature becomes normal The HDD cannot be accessed because the temperature in the vehicle is extremely high Please wait until the temperature becomes appropriate LOW TEMP ERROR Please wait until the temperature becomes normal The HDD cannot be accessed because the temperature in the vehicle is extremely low Please wait until the temperature becomes appropriate HDD ACCESS ERROR Please consult a dealer The HDD cannot be accessed The sectors or clusters of the HDD may be damaged gewaloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Please consult you nearest dealer About the Positioning Error Error of the veh
93. MENTE A TUTTO IL MATERIALE E ALLA DOCUMENTAZIONE CHE LO ACCOMPAGNANO AL SUO FORNITORE PER IL RIMBORSO DIRITTI DI PROPRIET Il Database nonch i diritti di autore e di propriet intellettuale o diritti connessi che vi sono collegati sono di propriet della NAVTEQ o dei Suoi licenziatori La propriet dei supporti nei quali il Database contenuto resta in capo alla NAVTEQ e o al Suo fornitore fino a che Lei non abbia pagato integralmente ogni somma dovuta alla NAVTEQ e o al Suo fornitore in base al presente contratto o in base a contratti simili in esecuzione dei quali i beni Le sono stati forniti CONCESSIONE DELLA LICENZA NAVTEQ Le concede una licenza non esclusiva per l uso personale del Database o se del caso per l uso nell ambito delle attivit interne della Sua impresa Questa licenza non include il diritto di concedere sublicenze LIMITAZIONI ALL USO L uso del Database limitato al sistema specifico per il quale stato creato Ad eccezione di quanto esplicitamente permesso da leggi obbligatorie per esempio leggi nazionali basate sulla Direttiva Europea in materia di software n 91 250 e la Direttiva sui Database n 96 9 Lei si impegna a non estrarre o riutilizzare parti sostanziali del contenuto del Database n a riprodurre copiare modificare adattare tradurre disassemblare decompilare deingegneri zzare qualsiasi parte del Database Qualora Lei desideri ottenere informazioni sulla interoperabilit nel
94. Press the OPEN CLOSE button to open the operation panel 2 Insert a disc into the centre of the insertion slot with the label side facing up The disc will automatically be drawn into the DVD player and the operation panel will automatically be closed O After setting a disc The system will automatically be switched to the relevant source mode according to the disc and start playing back the disc When a DVD video disc is set The system is switched to the DVD Video mode See DVD Video Operations P 25 When an Audio CD is set The system is switched to the CD mode See Audio CD Operations P 37 When a CD DVD with MP3 WMA files is set The system is switched to the MP3 WMA mode See MP3 WMA Operations P 33 Note Never insert foreign objects into the disc insertion slot If the disc is not inserted easily there may be another disc in the mechanism or the unit may require service 8 cm single play discs cannot be used 44 CAUTION For your safety the driver should not insert or eject a disc opening the operation panel while driving Ejecting the disc 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button to open the operation panel 2 Press the 4 EJECT button to eject the disc EJECT appears in the display and the source mode then switches to the Tuner mode e If a disc is left in the ejected position for 15 seconds the disc is automatically reloaded Auto relo
95. Screw Holes Side View of the Main Unit pera p For NISSAN vehicle j Mounting bracket 6 Flat head screw 1 pair for the left and right sides Be to the main unit ARA Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 6 Spacer thickness 1 mm TYNNYIN NOILO3NNO9 SHIM ONY NOILYTIVISNI TYNNYIN NOILO3NNO9 JIM ANY NOILYTIVISNI Installing the Main Unit Installing the main unit in a TOYOTA Vehicle Install by using parts attached to the vehicle Screws marked are attached to the vehicle 8 Hexagonal screw M5 x 8 Centre Panel 1 Mounting bracket 1 pair for the left and right sides Note 1 Some panel openings are too small for the unit 2 If a hook on the installation bracket interferes depending on the vehicle type and model In with the unit bend and flatten it with a nipper or such a case trim the upper and lower sides of the similar tool panel frame by about 0 5 to 1 5 mm so the unit can be inserted smoothly Typical Mounting Brackets Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Affix the screws to the O marks Vehicles other than NISSAN and TOYOTA In some cases the centre panel may require modification Trimming filing etc Removing the main unit When the main unit is to be removed disassemble it in the reverse of the order listed in this section gpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Installing the GPS Antenna WARNING
96. Shortcut menu on the Map screen 0 00 Radio operations Listening to the radio 1 Touch the Band key to select the radio band Each time touching this key the radio reception band changes in the following order FM1 3 FM2 AS AM MW LW gt FM1 2 Touch the desired Preset key on the Preset key pane to tune in the preset station e The AS is a special FM band used by the Auto Store function e Press the ke or gt gt Search button to tune in the previous or next preset station e From the AV Shortcut menu touch P ch keys to tune in the previous or next preset station Seek tuning There are 2 types of seek tuning DX Seek and LO Seek The DX Seek can tune in to receivable broadcast stations and the LO Seek can tune in to only broadcast stations with a good reception condition 1 Select the desired band by touching the Band key 2 Tune in to a station e If TA is displayed on the screen TP stations are automatically sought ZQpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Radio Operations DX Seek From the AV Shortcut menu Touch the v or A key to automatically 1 Select the desired band by touching the seek a station Band key When the A key is touched the station is 2 Touch P ch keys to tune in the previous or sought in the direction of higher frequencies next preset station 9 if ch a key is ie dn station is sought e You can also use the 14 and Pp E in
97. Source button to display the Source menu screen 2 Touch the Music Catcher key to select the Music Catcher mode The system changes to the Music Catcher mode and starts playback from the previous position Music Catcher mode screen Album Playlist title Track list pane 58 mipic catcher p A Girl Like Me 8 02 Unfaithful 04 We Ride Rihanna 05 Dem Haters 06 Final Goodbye Album List Edit Option 0 00 Information pane Track name AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen List Edit ES search 204 We Ride 5 0 00 Basic operations of the Music Catcher Note The operations described in this section operate only upon the selected albums playlists by using the Music Search function Searching tracks Music Search P 43 Selecting a track to play e This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Display the desired Track key on the Track list pane by touching the 4 or w key touch the Track key to play back the track Playback of the specified track starts Atpnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Music Catcher Operations Rp a track searching Displaying information registered Press the I or gt gt Search button for the album playlist track during playback 1 Display the item key of the album playlist Tracks are skipped as many as the times track you wish to display information pressing the button and playback s
98. TRA FORMA QUE N O NO DECURSO DE UMA TRANSAC O COMERCIAL ADVERT NCIAS A Base de Dados reflecte a realidade tal como existia at ao momento em que a recebeu e composta por dados e informa es provenientes de entidades governamentais e outras fontes podendo conter erros e omiss es Assim sendo a Base de Dados poder conter informa o inexacta ou incompleta devido passagem do tempo altera o de circunst ncias bem como natureza das fontes utilizadas A Base de Dados n o inclui ou incide sobre informa es referentes entre outros aspectos ao grau de seguran a nas imedia es execu o da lei assist ncia em situa es de emerg ncia obras de constru o estradas ou ruas vedadas circula o restri es de velocidade ou relativas a ve culos declive ou nivelamento de estradas bem como altura peso ou outros limites relativos a pontes condi es de estradas ou de tr nsito eventos especiais congestionamento do tr fego ou tempo de viagem LEI VIGENTE O presente Acordo dever ser regido pelas leis da jurisdi o do local de resid ncia do utilizador data de aquisi o da Base de Dados Caso resida de momento fora da Uni o Europeia ou Su a ser aplic vel a lei da jurisdi o pertencente Uni o Europeia ou Su a na qual tenha adquirido a Base de Dados Nos restantes casos ou perante a impossibilidade de definir a jurisdi o do local onde foi adquirida a Base de Dados ser ap
99. Touching an item of the list displays the icon at the location of the Safety Camera on the right map Note These settings are enabled when the Safety Camera data is stored in the hard disk gt Safety Camera P 51 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 53 7 Favourite Frequent List Operations What is Favourite Frequent List The system has the following 3 shortcut lists Favourite list You can register your favourite places Frequent list Destinations frequently entered are automatically registered Recent Album list Albums recently selected from the Music Search are automatically registered see the Audio Manual for details You can display these lists by easy operation and can specify your desired item to set as the destination or to be played back You can also customise these lists when its Angle is set to 2D list screen Using Favourite Frequent List Favourite Frequent list Favourite You can register up to 16 favourite places The favourite places can be registered from the Frequent by moving icons drag and drop In addition you can register your home address from the Home Location key of the Stored Data key in the Setting menu or places from Address Book Home Location P 49 Address Book P 49 Frequent The system automatically registers the places entered as the destinations in the past Up to 16 places where the number of times yo
100. Volledigheid van NAVTEQ geldend op de datum waarop u uw exemplaar van de Database hebt verkregen deze Criteria voor Nauwkeurigheid en Volledigheid worden u op uw verzoek ter beschikking gesteld door NAVTEQ Indien de Database niet functioneert in overeenstemming met deze beperkte garantie zal NAVTEQ zich redelijkerwijs inspannen om uw niet werkende exemplaar van de Database te repareren of te vervangen Indien de Database na deze inspanningen niet functioneert in overeenstemming met de garantie zoals hierboven beschreven hebt u de keuze tussen het verkrijgen van een redelijke vergoeding van de prijs die u hebt betaald voor de Database of ontbinding van deze egg aloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Overeenkomst Het voorgaande is NAVTEO s totale aansprakelijklheid en uw enige verhaalsmogelijkheid jegens NAVTEQ Behoudens voorzover uitdrukkelijk bepaald in dit artikel verleent NAVTEQ geen enkele garantie met betrekking tot het gebruik van de Database of de resultaten die u met behulp van de Database kunt verkrijgen in de zin van foutloosheid nauwkeurigheid betrouwbaarheid of anderszins NAVTEQ garandeert niet dat de Database foutloos is of zal zijn Mondelinge of schriftelijke informatie of adviezen die u door NAVTEQ uw leverancier of door enige andere persoon worden verstrekt houden geen garanties in binden NAVTEQ in geen enkel opzicht en houden geen uitbreiding van de hierboven omschreven beperkte garantie in De in deze
101. X983HD 579 SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE L ES VENLIGST DENNE SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE OMHYGGELIGT INDEN DU BEGYNDER AT BRUGE NAVTEQ DATABASE MEDDELELSE TIL BRUGEREN DETTE ER EN LICENSAFTALE OG IKKE EN SALGSAFTALE MELLEM DIG OG NAVTEQ B V VEDR RENDE DIN KOPI AF NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABASE HERUNDER TILKNYTTET COMPUTERSOFTWARE MEDIER OG SUPPLERENDE TRYKT MATERIALE UDGIVET AF NAVTEQ DATABASEN VED AT BRUGE DATABASEN ACCEPTERER DU ALLE VILK R OG BETINGELSER I DENNE SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALEN S FREMT DU IKKE KAN ACCEPTERE BETINGELSERNE N RV RENDE SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE SKAL DU STRAKS RETURNERE DATABASEN SAMMEN MED ALLE TILKNYTTEDE EMNER TIL FORHANDLEREN MOD REFUNDERING AF K BESUMMEN EJENDOMSRET Databasen samt ophavsrettigheder og intellektuelle ejendomsrettigheder eller naborettigheder deri ejes af NAVTEQ eller dennes licensgivere Ejendomsretten til de medier der indeholder Databasen bibeholdes af NAVTEQ og eller leverand ren indtil du har betalt alle i henhold til n rv rende slutbrugerlicensaftale eller lignende aftale r og efter hvilke varerne er leveret til dig de fulde bel b der skal betales til NAVTEQ og eller leverand ren LICENSUDSTEDELSE NAVTEQ udsteder dig en ikke eksklusiv licens til at bruge Databasen til personligt brug eller hvis relevant til brug i din virksomheds interne drift Denne licens indbefatter ikke retten til at udstede underlicenser BEGR NSNINGER I BRUGEN Da
102. Ze wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD DVD Video Operations Setting up the screen size Set the screen size according to the optional rear monitor which is connected to this unit 1 Touch the TV Display key 2 Touch the Wide N PS or N LB key to change the screen size to Wide N PS or N LB e The factory default setting is Wide 3 Touch the Back key O When watching through a wide type of the rear view monitor 16 9 Wide 00 00 cece O When watching through a conventional type of the rear view monitor 4 3 NPS The leftmost and rightmost areas of the screen are cut off This function allows displaying the important part of image fully on the screen In some cases image is displayed while being panned scrolled NLB A black zone is created in the top and bottom areas of the screen 00 00 voodoo This method displays Cinema Scope and Vista Vision images without cutting them off by creating a black zone on the top and bottom gaps Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Setting up the angle mark display You can set up so that the angle mark appears on scenes where the angles can be switched 1 Touch the Angle key 2 Touchthe ON or OFF key to turn the Angle function ON or OFF The factory default setting is OFF 3 Touch the Back key Setting up the disc menu language 1 Touch the Menu Language key 2 Touch t
103. a joka tapauksessa edellytt en ett siirronsaaja hyv ksyy kaikki t m n sopimuksen ehdot ja vahvistaa t m n kirjallisesti NAVTEOille Useita CD ROM levyj sis lt v t sarjat saa siirt tai myyd vain kokonaisena sarjana kuten NAVTEO on ne toimittanut ei osina RAJOITETTU TAKUU NAVTEQ takaa j ljemp n esitettyjen varoitusten sis lt min varauksin ett tietokanta toimii 12 kuukauden ajan siit kun k ytt j on hankkinut oman kopionsa t ytt en olennaisin osin NAVTEQin tarkkuus ja t ydellisyyskriteerit sellaisina kuin kriteerit ovat voimassa hankintap iv n NAVTEQ toimittaa kriteerit k ytt j lle pyynn st Jos tietokanta ei toimi t m n rajoitetun vastuun edellytt m ll tavalla NAVTEQ pyrkii mahdollisuuksien mukaan korjaamaan tai vaihtamaan tietokannan puutteellisesti toimivan kopion Jos n m toimet eiv t johda siihen ett tietokanta toimisi esitetyn takuun mukaisesti k ytt j voi valintansa mukaan joko saada kohtuullisen korvauksen maksamastaan hankintahinnasta tai purkaa t m n sopimuksen NAVTEQin vastuuvelvollisuus rajoittuu t h n eik nimenomaisesti annettua takuuta lukuun ottamatta NAVTEQ ei anna mit n takuita tietokannan tai sen avulla saatavien tulosten virheett myydest tarkkuudesta luotettavuudesta tai muista ominaisuuksista NAVTEQ ei takaa ett tietokanta on t ll hetkell tai tulevaisuudessa virheet n Mik n NAVTEQin ohjelmistotoimittajan tai muun henkil n antama suullinen
104. a o mo nosti takov ch kod V ka d m p pad je odpov dnost spolecnosti NAVTEO za p m kody omezena cenou Va kopie Datab ze OMEZEN Z RUKA A OMEZEN ODPOV DNOSTI UVEDEN V T TO SMLOUV SE NEDOT K ANI NEN K JM VA ICH Z KONN CH PR V V P PAD KDY JSTE NABYL A DATAB ZI JINAK NE V PR B HU PODNIK N VAROV N Datab ze odr skute nost existuj c p edt m ne jste obdr el a Datab zi a zahrnuje daje a informace od st tn ch org n a jin ch zdroj kter mohou obsahovat chyby a opomenut Datab ze tud m e obsahovat nep esn nebo ne pln informace n sledkem uplynut asu m n c ch se okolnost a rovn vzhledem k povaze u van ch zdroj Datab ze nezahrnuje ani neodr informace o mimo jin bezpe nosti bl zk ho okol vym h n pr va pomoci p i stavu nouze stavebn ch pracech uz v r ch silnic nebo j zdn ch pruh omezen ch t kaj c ch se vozidel nebo rychlosti stoup n nebo sklonu vozovky v ce most hmotnosti nebo jin ch omezen ch silni n ch nebo dopravn ch podm nk ch zvl tn ch ud lostech dopravn ch z cp ch nebo j zdn dob ROZHODN PR VO Tato Smlouva se d z kony jurisdikce v n m te pobyt k datu po zen Datab ze Pokud byste v t dob m l a pobyt mimo Evropskou unii nebo v carsko uplatn se pr vo jurisdikce v r mci Evropsk unie nebo v carska kde jste si po
105. acenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warranties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the rightto delete data from the Gracenote Servers orto change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its ser
106. aci n nacional en la que se basa la Directiva sobre software deber conceder a NAVTEQ el plazo adecuado para suministrarle dicha informaci n en un t rmino razonable incluidos los costes a determinar por NAVTEQ TRANSFERENCIA DE LA LICENCIA No podr transferir la Base de datos a terceros salvo que sta haya sido instalada en el sistema para el cual ha sido desarrollada o si no conserva ninguna copia de la Base de datos y siempre que el beneficiario de la transferencia se declare conforme con todos los t rminos y condiciones de este Contrato y lo notifique por escrito a NAVTEQ Los paquetes multidisco podr n ser transferidos o vendidos nicamente como un paquete completo tal como los suministra NAVTEQ y no como un subpaquete del mismo LIMITACI N DE LA GARANT A Sujeto a lo dispuesto en el apartado Advertencias que se expone m s adelante NAVTEQ garantiza que durante los doce meses siguientes a la adquisici n de su copia de la Base de datos sta funcionar sustancialmente de acuerdo con los Criterios de Precisi n e Integridad de NAVTEQ vigentes a la fecha en que usted ha adquirido dicho ejemplar de la Base de datos a solicitud suya la presente limitaci n de garant a NAVTEQ dentro de los t rminos razonables tomar las medidas pertinentes para reparar o sustituir dicho ejemplar defectuoso de la Base de datos Si las medidas tomadas no conducen al funcionamiento de la Base de datos en conformidad con la garant a aqu descr
107. ack New Dest Nearby POI Store Location 43212 MILLBANK Back key Nearby POI key Returns to the scrolled Map screen before Displays the Category screen of the POIs in the touching the OK key vicinity of the location under the cursor New Dest key Store Location key Sets the location under the cursor as the Registers the location under the cursor in the destination When a destination is already set Address Book the old destination is cancelled as soon as the new destination is set Delete key When the cursor points at a stored location Add to Route key pressing this key deletes this location from the When another location is already set as the Address Book destination you can set the location under the cursor as a waypoint Touching this key displays the Edit Route screen Specify the desired order of passing to set the location as a waypoint gt Editing the route P 33 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 9 MAX983HD Map Screen Features Types of the map There are two types of map the 2D map and the 3D map Such as the method of scrolling the map some operation are different depending on the map types Moreover you can display two types of maps at the same time on the divided screen and can change the map orientation Change the map appearance according to your preferences Scrolling the Map P 16 Changing the map appearance P 16 02D Map 03D Map D
108. ad In this case however the source mode will remain set to the Tuner mode Note e Do not eject the disc while recording the audio CD Eject the disc after the recording is completed or after cancelling the recording Ifyou force a disc into the insertion slot before auto reloading this can damage the disc Rewnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Setting Ejecting an SD Card In this system SD cards are used for playing back MP3 WMA music data importing exporting data Skin Image Album Information Extra POI and backing up restoring the user data Stored Locations system settings etc Note Use the SD memory cards formatted in FAT16 or VFAT format The SDHC cards are cannot be used Setting an SD card 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE button to open the operation panel 2 Confirming the orientation of the SD card insert the SD card surely into the SD card slot until it stops 3 Press the OPEN CLOSE button to close the operation panel Note Never insert foreign objects into the SD card slot If the SD card is not inserted easily there may be another card in the mechanism or the unit may require service A CAUTION For your safety the driver should not insert or eject an SD card opening the operation panel while driving Ejecting the SD card Note Do not eject the SD card until the operation panel is completely opened Data in the SD card may be broken
109. addition audio cannot be reproduced during slow playback Fast forward and fast backward Touch and hold a Chapter key during playback gt gt key Fast forward lt lt key Fast backward The playback speed becomes 5 times faster at first and then 10 times faster 3 seconds later Releasing the key resumes the normal speed playback e The ke and gt gt Search buttons can also be used instead of the Chapter keys No audio is reproduced during fast forward and fast backward operation The fast forward and fast backward speed may differ depending on the disc and hold the IH key for more than 1 second Skipping chapters searching during playback Playback is stopped 2 To resume playback touch the gt II key Playback resumes from the scene where playback is stopped 1 Pausing playback 1 Showing the DVD video mode screen touch the gt 11 key during playback Playback pauses 2 To resume playback touch the gt 11 key again Playback resumes Afpwaloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Chapter means a small segment to divide the Title film which is recorded on the disc Touch a Chapter key during playback Chapters are skipped as many as the times touching the key and playback starts Current location down lt up Touching the gt gt key starts playback from the beginning of the next chapter Touching th
110. aj navigacijski sustav ne moze se koristiti kao zamjena za vlastitu procjenu Bilo kakvi smjerovi koje ovaj navigacijski sustav predloZi ne mogu ni u kojem slu aju imati prednost pred lokalnom prometnom regulacijom Va om vlastitom procjenom i ili znanjima o sigurnoj voZnji Zanemarite smjerove koje navigacijski sustav predlozi ukoliko biste zbog takvih prijedloga morali poduzeti opasnu ili nezakonitu radnju doveli sebe u opasnu situaciju ili bili usmjereni u podru je koje smatrate nesigurnim Upute koje daje navigacijski sustav treba smatrati isklju ivo prijedlozima Mogu e su situacije kad navigacijski sustav pogre no pokazuje lokaciju vozila ne predla e najkra i put i ili Vas ne usmjerava prema eljenom odredi tu U takvim situacijama oslonite se na Va u voza ku procjenu uzimaju i u obzir trenutne uvjete za vo nju Ne koristite navigacijski sustav za usmjeravanje prema hitnim slu bama Zbirka podataka ne sadr i cjelovit popis lokacija hitnih slu bi kao to su policija vatrograsne stanice bolnice i klinike Molimo koristite vlastitu procjenu i mogu nost da u takvim situacijama zatra ite upute Kao voza Vi ste isklju ivo odgovorni za Va u sigurnost na cestama Kako biste izbjegli prometne nesre e odnosno prometni prekr aj imajte na umu kako uvjeti na cesti te prometna regulacija imaju prednost pred informacijama sadr anim u navigacijskom sustavu Slijedom navedenog program software mo e sadr avati net
111. aking into account current driving conditions Minimize the amount of time spent viewing the screen while driving The driver should not operate this unit while driving Be sure to stop the vehicle in a safe place when the driver is operating this unit For safety some of the navigation functions are prohibited if the vehicle is not stopped with the parking brake engaged A CAUTION While driving set the volume so that sound from outside the vehicle can be heard Driving without hearing sound from the outside of the vehicle may cause a traffic incident Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD About This Manual The following two manuals are provided to this system Owner s Manual Audio Visual General amp Installation This manual hereinafter referred to as Audio Manual explains the functions and operation procedures of the AV features In addition the general precautions and other information on using this system are also explained in this manual Owner s Manual Navigation This Book This manual hereinafter referred to as Navigation Manual explains the functions and operation procedures of the navigation features Note This manual is described on the assumption that the default Skin data has been applied When the other Skin data is applied the screen design and shapes of icons will be different from the contents listed in this manual Please be aw
112. and Address Book P 49 1 Touch the Address Book key 2 From the displayed Address Book list touch the stored location you wish to go Sort You can select the sorting method by Number Displayed by the registered order e by Name Displayed by the alphabetical order of the name by Icon Displayed the list classified by icon type by Group Displayed the list classified by groups Note You can store a new location by touching the None Add New key For storing or editing procedure see Address Book P 49 3 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the OK key 4 Touch the Start key Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals By Points of Interest POI Select the category of the place narrow down the data by specifying the area or entering the name and then select the place you wish to go to By touching the by Name key you can also search a place by simply entering the name 1 Touch the Points of Interest key 2 Touch your desired category When a additional category list is displayed touch a category again to select one 3 Enter the city name and place name 4 From the displayed place list touch the place you wish to go to select it by Dist The list is sorted by nearby order after pressing this key This key is displayed when the list is set to the alphabetical order by Name The list is sorted by alphabetical order after pressing th
113. anual com Manuals Displaying Tag information of a track 1 Touch the List key to display the Folder list screen 2 Touch the desired Folder key The Track list screen appears 3 Touch the desired track key you wish to display the Tag information then touch the O key displayed at the right of the Track key The Tag information of specified track is displayed Folder Mundo Y Formas De La Gult Album Mundo Y Formas De La Guit Track Andares Gaditanos Artist Manolo Sanlucar Genre Please select a menu item 4 Touch the Back key Scrolling titles When a title or other information displayed on the screen is longer than the text area you can confirm the entire text by scrolling it 1 Displaying the text you wish to scroll touch the key displayed at the right of the text area The text will scroll once MAX983HD 35 jenuew saumo MP3 WMA Operations Other various play functions 3 To cancel the play touch the same touch key This operation cannot be performed from the to cancel the function AV Shortcut menu screen 4 Touch the Back key to return to the previous 1 Touch the Option key screen The Option menu screen is displayed SA Option Scan Folder Track 2 a 3 FS 5 5 Repeat Folder 1 Track Random All Track 1 Folder O Please select a menu item 2 Touch a touch key of the function you want to play Folder scan playback Touch the Fol
114. anual for details Ku key Changes the viewing angle of the screen by switch to the 2D screen Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals QUEEN ELIZ HEATHROW L Icon Indicates the category of each registered place For the rotating icon the registered name is displayed at the upper left of the screen By touching the desired icon you can set the registered place as the destination Searching Your Destination from the Favourite Frequent List P 27 For the Favourite Frequent list items registered from the Stored Locations the name and number in the Address Book are displayed together with the icon If an image data is registered the image is displayed instead of the icon Back key Returns to the previous screen Registered name Place name Displays the registered name place name or facility name of the place which is selected rotating icon MAX983HD 55 Using Favourite Frequent List 2D List screen Frequent GABLE CT SE26 JACKSON SQUARE UNDERGROUND E PLEASURELAND Back OCEAN VILLAGE fr ALVERTON MANO M BLACKPOOL PLEA PALM BEACH CA D WATERFRONT C AR c a HOLLYWO BOULEVARD EAST ABBEY RD KILBU CAR amp VAN HIRE F JOHN RADCLIFFE Icon Indicates the category of a registered place The icon can be moved by touching and dragging it Thus you can change the location of the desired icon in the
115. anuals MAX983HD Map Screen Features TMC traffic information symbols When the system receives RDS TMC traffic information detailed TMC traffic information on the route are displayed on the map TMC traffic information is displayed on the map with symbols and congestion information colour gt 5 Traffic Information P 38 Example of TMC traffic information displayed Current location map screen with traffic Screen of TMC traffic information on route information E Traffic Info on Route A In 2km On A4 Rot L in 2km On A4 13 dE in 30km On N118 Stationar FE 8 39 62km 14 AV DU GENERAL GALLIENI 4 Please select a menu item for detail Symbols used for TMC traffic information A Accident KAN Broken vehicle Traffic f congestion A Delay At Contra flow A Lane restrictions Fog reduced n Ay visibility A Ham Ach Wind i Information Congestion information colour Vehicle on wrong ae carriage way Roadworks O Closed road Road surface in poor condition A Slippery road Snow Weather Major events Danger gt E pp Closed Purple Jammed Red Moderate Yellow Free flow Green No data unknown Not displayed no colour Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 15 Manipulating the Map Screen Scrolling the Map Touching the Map screen displays a cursor atthe centre ofthe screen and you can scroll the map For the 2D map touch the map to move the map to the
116. ap database are different or the vehicle speed If the content of the voice guidance does not match the actual roads or regulations follow the information acquired from the actual traffic or road signs The voice guidance is activated only for intersections with certain conditions There may be cases that the vehicle has to turn but the voice guidance is not activated The content of the voice guidance may vary depending on the direction of the turn and the type of the intersection The voice guidance timing will vary depending on the situation The voice guidance is not available when the voice guidance function is not set to ON Moreover even when the voice guidance function is set to ON if the voice guidance volume is set to a very low value the voice guidance may not be audible Guidance Voice Settings P 44 The voice guidance will start when the vehicle enters the suggested route Before entering the route refer to the map screen for directions When the vehicle approaches a waypoint the voice guidance will say You have arrived at waypoint lt 1 to 5 gt The voice guidance will switch to the next route section Please referto the map screen for directions until the next voice guidance is started When the vehicle approaches a destination the voice guidance will say You have arrived at the destination For the remainder of the way please refer to the map screen for direction
117. are that the device may be different from the manual according to the changes of the specifications Symbols used in this manual Note Lists what should be noted when operating or referential information button Indicates a button on this unit I key Indicates a menu item on the screen gt i Indicates a title and page number on which recommended reference information is described Notes on Handling In no event shall Clarion be liable for any incidental damage including but not limited to loss of the business profit or change loss of the data caused from use or inability to use of this product Note When using this unit first time after purchasing or not used for long periods of time it might take about 5 to 15 minutes until the current location is determined using GPS Moreover even when using it often it may take about 2 to 3 minutes until the current location is determined according to the GPS measuring situation Provided RDS TMC information about traffic incidents may not be up to date Use the provided RDS TMC information as a reference only When the route path cannot be calculated move desired destination to a nearby main road and perform calculation again It may be impossible to find a route in case the car location is too close to the desired destination downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Contents 1 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Preface mmmes
118. ase oppure risolvere questo contratto Ci costituir l intera respons abilit di NAVTEQ e il Suo unico rimedio contro NAVTEQ Ad eccezione di quanto esplicitamente previsto in questa clausola NAVTEQ non garantisce n fa alcuna affermazione riguardo l uso o i risultati deluso del Database in termini di correttezza accuratezza affidabilit od altro NAVTEQ non garantisce che il Database sia o sar senza errori Nessuna informazione orale o scritta ey loaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD e nessun consiglio fornito da NAVTEQ dal Suo fornitore o da qualsiasi altra persona costituiranno una garanzia o in qualsiasi modo un ampliamento dell ambito della garanzia limitata sopra descritta La garanzia limitata accordata in questo contratto non incide n pregiudica alcun diritto derivante dalla legge che Lei possa vantare in relazione alla garanzia legale contro i difetti occulti Se Lei non ha acquistato il Database direttamente da NAVTEQ Lei pu avere un diritto se previsto dalla legge nei confronti della persona dalla quale Lei ha acquistato il Database in aggiunta ai diritti concessi da NAVTEQ con questo contratto secondo il diritto della giurisdizione in cui Lei risiede Questa garanzia di NAVTEQ non incider su tali pretese legali e Lei potr far valere tali diritti in aggiunta ai diritti di garanzia qui riconosciuti LIMITAZIONE DELLA RESPONSABILIT Il prezzo del Database non comprende alcun compenso per la cope
119. atedly e T RPT is displayed on the information pane Track random playback Touch the Track key of the Random item e This operation plays back tracks recorded in the disc in no particular order e T RDM is displayed on the information pane 3 To cancel the play touch the same touch key to cancel the function 4 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Recording tracks from a CD With the factory default setting alltracks on a CD are automatically recorded when the first time setting the disc into the DVD player You can also change this setting to the setting of which the recording is not performed automatically but it is performed manually Recordable number of albums or tracks Up to 500 albums can be recorded Up to 99 tracks can be included in an album Up to 4000 tracks can be recorded Up to 16 GB HDD space can be used for audio data Setting the manual recording mode For the setting operation see Switching the CD Recording mode P 66 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Recording tracks e This operation cannot be performed when all the tracks on the CD is already recorded 1 Set the audio CD you wish to record into the 2 Touch the REC key DVD player The Audio CD mode screen is displayed The Rec Mode screen is displayed s 58 Rec Mode All Tracks Current Selected Track Tracks CD 14 Tracks lt Total time 01 01 27 gt
120. ation You can download this application from the Clarion homepage htip www clarion eu com Apwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Importing Data Using the SD Card Extra POI You can import the Extra POI data stored in the SD card into the hard disk drive Touch the Import key of the Extra POI item then operate according to the displayed messages To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive touch the Delete key Safety Camera You can import the location database of Safety Cameras stored in the SD card to the hard disk drive Touch the Import key of Safety Camera then operate according to the displayed messages To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive touch the Delete key Note This function displays the locations of Safety Cameras on the map using the imported location database of the Safety Camera on the hard disk drive and warns that the vehicle approaches the location For details see the Clarion s homepage Be sure to import the location database of Safety Cameras while the vehicle is stopped The message Reading Safety Camera data disappears when the import is finished If the vehicle starts to move before the message disappears the import will be cancelled Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 71 jenuew S I3umg Service Options From the Service Option menu you can perform the operation such as displaying a de
121. ature becomes normal again Though certain buzzing can be heard when the hard disk drive is working this is not a malfunction 1 You can back up the following data the data of the Stored Locations the route data the data registered in Favourite Frequent list the setting data of the Settings menu The recorded music data Playlist data and data imported using SD cards Skin Image Album Information Extra POI cannot be backed up About the liquid crystal panel For a longer service life be sure to read the following notes Important The operation panel will operate properly in a temperature range of 0 to 60 C Do not allow any liquids on the set from drinks umbrellas etc Doing so may damage the internal circuitry Do not disassemble or modify the set in any way Doing so may result in damage Subjecting the operation panel to shocks may result in breakage deformation or other damage Do not let cigarettes burn the display Doing so may damage or deform the cabinet If a problem should occur have the set inspected at your store of purchase Do not insert objects or poke in the space between the operation panel and the main unit when the panel is tilted In extremely cold weather the display movement may slow down and the display may darken but this is not a malfunction The display will work normally when the temperature increases Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Small black and shiny sp
122. avig ci s rendszert arra hogy az Ont seg lyszolg lati helyekre vezesse A rendszer nem tartalmaz teljes list t a segelyszolg latokr l mint amilyen a rend rseg t zolt s g k rh zak s klinik k Ebben az esetben int zkedjen legjobb bel t sa szerint s k rjen t j koztat st az tir nyr l A vezet kiz r lag saj t maga felel a k z ti biztons g ert A k zleked si balesetek s szab lys rt sek elker l se rdek ben mindig tartsa szem el tt hogy az aktu lis t s k zleked si viszonyok k zleked si szab lyok els bbs get lveznek a navig ci s rendszeren tal lhat inform ci kkal szemben Igy a szoftver pontatlan vagy hi nyos inform ci kat adhat az tvonal idej b l a v ltoz k r lm nyekb l s az inform ci k term szet b l ad d an ez rt az aktu lis k zleked si k r lm nyeket a vezet s teljes id tartama alatt vegye figyelembe A navig ci s rendszer nem veszi figyelembe s nem ny jt inform ci t a k zleked si szab lyokra a g pj rm vek s ly ra magass g ra sz less g re rakom ny ra vonatkoz an az t viszonyokra bele rtve az emelked ket kanyarokat s vagy tfel leti viszonyokat az akad lyokra vonatkoz inform ci k a hidak s alagutak hossz t s sz less g t s vagy egy b jellemz k zleked si s vagy tviszonyokat tartalmazz k Vezet s k zben mindig saj t d nt s re hagyatkozzon figyelembe v ve az aktu lis k zle
123. aximum allowable number of files in a card is 255 e The maximum allowable number of files in a folder is 99 Folder representation in the Folder list Only folders containing MP3 WMA files to in illustration are displayed on the list Folders containing no MP3 WMA file are not displayed Folder hierarchy is ignored and unified into 1 level Folders are arranged in the order of the folder creation MAX983HD 33 jenuew S I3umg MP3 WMA Operations Selecting the MP3 WMA mode The MP3 WMA mode is actually separated in CD mode or SD Card mode and the selecting methods differ depending on the media source Selecting the CD mode 1 Set a disc which the MP3 WMA data is recorded to the DVD player The system will automatically read the disc data change to the CD mode MP3 WMA mode and start playback after a while gt Setting Ejecting a Disc P 15 A WARNING Some tracks may be recorded at a higher volume level than desired Increase the volume gradually from the minimal setting after the playback has started When a disc is already set 1 Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen 2 Touch the DVD CD key to select the CD mode The system changes to the CD mode MP3 WMA mode and starts playback from the previous position Selecting the SD Card mode 1 Set an SD card which the MP3 WM
124. ayed contents for each key differ depending on the DVD software An example shown below is the DVD menu display Operating the DVD menu Direct Touch 1 Touch the desired menu item displayed on the screen The function assigned to the menu item will be activated MAX983HD 29 jenuew saumo jenuew 5 12UMQ DVD Video Operations Operating the DVD menu Key Pad Slow playback When the menu items are hard to select 1 correctly you can also operate them by displaying the Key Pad panel When the Key Pad is displayed Direct Touch operation of the button items is disabled 1 Press the OUT Zoom Out or IN Zoom In button The Cursor Key Pad panel is displayed on the screen e Touching the Num key changes the panel to the Numeric Key Pad 1 Top Menu Menu 2 Select the desired menu item using either the Cursor Key or the Num Key according to the menu contents 3 Touch the ENT key to specify the selected menu item 4 Touch the Back key to hide the Key Pad panel Stopping playback 1 Showing the DVD video mode screen touch Touch the gt 11 key during playback to pause playback then touch and hold the Chapter key While touching the key slow playback continues at 1 3 speed Releasing the key resumes the normal playback The gt gt Search button can also be used instead of the Chapter key Slow playback cannot be performed in the backward direction In
125. before entering in a place with low ceiling such as a multistory car park Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Set button e Press this button to enter exit the Setting mode to perform the system setting Keep pressing this button more than 1 second to turn off the monitor Monitor OFF Blinking LED e When the Blinking LED function is set to ON from the General menu in the Setting mode blinks when the power is turned off SRC Source button e Press this button to display hide the Source menu screen Keep pressing this button more than 1 second to turn off the AV feature Audio Off ea gt gt Search buttons In the Tuner and TV Tuner modes use these buttons to change to the previous next preset station In the DVD Video mode use these buttons to select a chapter to be played Keep pressing a button during playback performs the fast backward fast forward operation Keep pressing the BH button during pausing performs the slow playback In the Audio CD MP3 WMA Music Catcher and iPod modes use these buttons to select a track to be played Keep pressing a button during playback performs the fast backward fast forward operation MAX983HD 9 jenuew saumo Name and Function of the Controls MAP button Press this button to display the Map screen of the current location in any mode Keep pressing this button more than 1 second to display the Turn by Turn Compa
126. bited by law in some countries Also while driving keep the volume to a level at which external sounds can be heard Do not disassemble or modify this unit It may cause an accident fire or electric shock Do not use this unit when a trouble exists such as no screen content appears or no sound is audible It may cause an accident fire or electric shock For that case consult your authorised dealer or a nearest service centre In case of a problem such as foreign materials have entered in the unit the unit gets wet or smoke or strange smells come out of the unit etc stop using this unit immediately and consult your authorised dealer or a nearest service centre Using it in that condition may cause an accident fire or electric shock Use a fuse with the same specification only when replacing the fuse Using a fuse with a different specification may cause a fire For the installation of this unit or a change in the installation ask your authorised dealer or a nearest service centre for safety Professional skills and experiences are required to do so A CAUTION Do not use this unit without installing in the vehicle properly lt may cause an injury or electric shock This appliance contains a laser system and is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT MAX983HD ciation MODEL 12V GROUND 153 279kHz 531 1602kHz 213 03 4042 TYPE QY 5002 MW FM UKW 87 5 108MHz CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
127. ceeds 100 items the oldest entries are automatically deleted 1 Touch the gt gt Next key 2 Touch the Previous Destinations key 3 From the displayed previous destination list touch the place you wish to go 4 Touch the OK key 5 Touch the Start key By Previous Starting Point You can set the last start location as the destination In case you want to set a return route from the reached destination you can enter the new destination quickly using this method 1 Touch the gt gt Next key 2 Touch the Previous Starting Point key 3 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the OK key 4 Touch the Start key By Postal Code You can search for destinations by entering the country name and the postal code of the place you wish to go to Note In some countries or districts it may be hard to search specific places In such cases use postal code search as a subsidiary function of searching addresses 1 Touch the gt Next key 2 Touch the Postcode key 3 Touch the Country key and touch the desired country name 4 Touch the Postcode key The postal code input screen is displayed 5 Enter the postal code by touching number keys on the screen 6 Touch the OK key For the rest of the procedure read the sections that apply to the country of your residence O When the Country is set to the United Kingdom or the Netherlands 1 Touch the Pinpoi
128. ch y Confirm the position of the place found with the Set Location menu screen or Place menu screen then set the destination You can store the place found to the Address Book or can confirm the information according to the place as well as set it as destination O Start the route guidance from the Set Route menu screen You can also display other suggested routes or confirm information of the route Other than the above procedure you can also enter the destination by scrolling the map or from the Favourite Frequent menu Setting destination by entering the address This section explains the basic operation procedure to set the destination in detail using the example to specify the destination by entering the address from the Destination menu Read this explanation thoroughly because this procedure is similar to other destination entering methods For other destination entering methods see 3 Entering the Destination P 22 1 Press the MENU button The Destination menu of the navigation system is displayed 2 Touch the Address key 4 Touch the country name you wish to go The specified country name is displayed AS Country The Address input screen is displayed SWEDEN SWITZERLAND Destination Cancel Route THE NETHERLANDS Address Address Book Points of ZE UNITED KINGDOM Interest VATICAN CITY STATE NOA En TUO Es O Please select a country EEE A Scrolls the list up or down by one i
129. change the album to play by the album skip operation Touching the by Name key sorts the list by the alphanumerical order of the album title In this list touching the alphabet key displayed at the right of the screen scrol the list to the first item of which the initia Is character of the album title matches to the specified key character Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list o by Artist Touch the Artists key on the Music Search screen The Artist list is displayed with the alphanumerical order 2 Touch the desired Artist key you wish to search data The Album list of the specified artist is displayed with the order of recorded date Touching the alphabet key displayed at the right of the screen scrolls the list to the first Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals item of which the initial character of the artist name matches to the specified key character Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list 3 Touch the desired Album key you wish to play back Selecting All Albums key specifies all the album data of the specified artist You can change the album to play by the album s operation Touching the by Name key sorts the list kip by the alphanumerical order of the album title In this list touching the alphabet key displayed at the right of the screen scrol the list to the first item of which the initia Is character of the album title matches to the
130. check the Illumination connection once turn the lights on RDS TMC MAX983HD 47 Audio Settings When you touch the Audio key from the Setting menu you can set various setting concerning the audio features For details see the Audio Manual Adjusting the Monitor Setting the Screen Colour mode The system has two Screen Colour mode the Day mode and the Night mode Each Screen Colour mode has the own dimmer level setting To switch to the Day mode or Night mode manually touch the Day or Night key of the Screen Colour item on the Setting menu When the Auto key is selected the Screen Colour mode is automatically switched according to whether the illumination of the vehicle is turned off or on When you touch the Monitor key from the Setting menu you can adjust the dimmer level of the monitor screen Monitor settings When you touch the Monitor key from the Setting menu you can adjust the dimmer level of the monitor screen The dimmer level adjustment operates upon the current Screen Colour mode 1 Touch the Monitor key to display the Monitor menu screen 2 Touch the or key to adjust the dimmer level Touch to make image brighter gt Touch to make image dimmer User Settings When you touch the User key from the Setting menu you can register the User Profiles to personalise the Favourite Frequent Recent Album list data For details see the Audio Manual Agpwnloade
131. cified video data will be displayed on the information pane 4 Touch the information pane The video data will be displayed on the whole screen Note Audio Only is displayed when the motorcar is moving 5 To return to the iPod mode screen touch the screen 6 To terminate the Video mode touch the MENU key then touch the Music key The video playback is terminated and the system returns to the audio playback mode Note Video data may not be played back according to the status of the iPod Selecting the screen size When in the Video mode you can change the screen size of the video image to suit to the screen panel 1 Touch the screen to display the iPod mode screen then touch the EM key 2 Touch the Wide Cinema or Normal key to set the desired screen size e The factory default setting is Wide Wide The image is expanded so that the rectangle of the image fits to the screen The aspect ratio of the image may be changed Cinema The image is expanded so that the left and right edges of the image fit to the screen The top and bottom areas of the image may be cut off Normal The image is expanded so that the top and bottom edges of the image fit to the screen 3 Touch the information pane to display the video image on the whole screen Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD SS Telephone Operations This function is enabled when the optional Bluetoot
132. code list Country Input code Country Input code LIECHTENSTEIN 7673 LUXEMBOURG 7685 MACEDONIA THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF 7775 MALTA 7784 MONACO 7767 NETHERLANDS 7876 ALBANIA 6576 NETHERLANDS ANTILLES 6578 ANDORRA 6568 NORWAY 7879 AUSTRIA 6584 OMAN 7977 BAHRAIN 6672 POLAND 8076 BELGIUM 6669 PORTUGAL 8084 BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA 6665 QATAR 8165 ROMANIA 8279 BULGARIA 6671 SAN MARINO 8377 CROATIA local name Hrvatska 7282 SAUDI ARABIA 8365 SLOVAKIA Slovak Republic 8375 CYPRUS 6789 SLOVENIA 8373 CZECH REPUBLIC 6790 SOUTH AFRICA 9065 DENMARK 6875 SPAIN 6983 EGYPT 6971 SWAZILAND 8390 FINLAND 7073 SWEDEN 8369 FRANCE 7082 SWITZERLAND 6772 FRANCE METROPOLITAN 7088 SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC 8389 GERMANY 6869 TURKEY 8482 GREECE 7182 UNITED ARAB EMIRATES 6569 HUNGARY 7285 UNITED KINGDOM 7166 ICELAND 7383 Vatican City State 8665 IRAN ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF 7382 YEMEN 8969 IRAQ 7381 YUGOSLAVIA 8985 IRELAND 7369 FAROE ISLANDS 7079 ISRAEL 7376 GIBRALTAR 7173 ITALY 7384 GREENLAND
133. completely impossible or impossible on some scenes lt may take time to switch among subtitles 3 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen O To turn off subtitles 1 Repeat touching the Subtitle key until 0 X OFF is displayed on the screen Subtitles are turned off Switching angles On DVD discs in which video images have been recorded in two or more angles you can switch among the angles during playback This operation can be performed when the Setting up the angle mark display function see page 27 is set to ON This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Touch the 4 Angle key during playback Each time you touch the key you can switch among angles e Depending on the disc up to 9 angles may be recorded For details see the mark of the disc Py Indicates multi angle e Depending on the disc angles may switch smoothly or switch with a momentary still image Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD When the power is turned on and the disc is changed to a new one the language set at the time of factory shipment is selected If that language has not been recorded the language is specified on the disc Depending on the disc switching may be completely impossible or impossible on some scenes It may take time to switch among angles Depending on the disc scenes recorded in two or more angles may be played back MP3 WM
134. correctly fails to suggest the shortest course and or fails to direct you to your desired destination In such situations rely on your own driving judgment taking into account current driving conditions Do not use the navigation system to route you to emergency services The database does not contain a complete listing of locations of emergency service providers such as police fire stations hospitals and clinics Please use your judgment and your ability to ask for directions in these situations As a driver you are solely responsible for your road safety In order to avoid a traffic accident or traffic offence remember that actual road conditions and traffic regulations take precedence over the information contained in the navigation system Accordingly the software may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time changing circumstances and due to the nature of the sources used Please observe the actual traffic circumstances and regulations at all times while driving The navigation system does not provide or account for in any way information regarding traffic and road laws vehicle specifications including weight height width load and or speed restrictions road conditions including road slope grade and or surface conditions obstruction information including bridge and tunnel height and width and or other prevailing driving and or road conditions Always rely on your own driving judgment t
135. cters and proceeds to the city name List Note By touching the OK key the city name list is displayed even if you do not enter all characters During the character entry the system shows the city name list automatically when the amount of matching cities is five or less 7 Touch the city name you wish to go to Then the system returns to the Address input screen AR City LONDON LONDON APPRENTICE ST AUSTELL LONDON COLNEY ST ALBANS LONDON HEATHROW AIRPORT HOU LONDON LUTON AIRPORT LUTON O Please select a city Alphabet Scrolls the list to each initial letter The total number of list items is displayed at the left of the screen 8 Touch the Street key The Street input screen is displayed Note You can omit the street name entry By touching the OK key proceed to step 13 AS Address Country UNITED KINGDOM city LONDON Street House No select a menu item 9 Enter the street name you wish to go to by touching characters on the screen then touch the OK key Enter by the same way as the city name entry The street name list is displayed Street ABBF Accent 0 9 Symbols Please enter a street name 178 10 Touch the street name you wish to go to Then the system returns to the Address input screen E Street ABBEY CLOSE SWB LONDON ABBEY CLOSE VAUXHALL LONDON ABBEY COURT NWB LONDON ABBEY COURT SE17 LONDON ABBEY COURT ST JOHNS WOOD gt
136. d from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Registering Editing the Data From the Stored Data menu you can register the home address addresses of facilities and places routes track data and Avoid Areas You can also edit the data registered The registered places or routes can be set as the destination or as the current route 1 Touch the gt gt Next key from the Setting menu 2 Touch the Stored Data key to display the Stored Data menu Home Location Registers your home address You can edit the registered home address To register the Home Location The Home Location can be registered when the Home Location Add New key is displayed 1 Touch the Home Location Add New key 2 Search the location of your home by a similar way as for entering destinations 3 Confirm the searched location edit items if required then touch the OK key to register it Edit Edits the registered Home Location e Show Icon on Map Shows hides the home icon on the map Icon Changes the icon for the Home Location Image Specifies the image data for the Home Location Sound Selects the sound heard when you get near the Home Location Direction Sets the approach direction for locations along roads with separated lanes for each direction Distance Sets the distance for locations along roads with separated lanes for each direction Phone No Registers the telephone
137. d in random order and tracks in the albums are played back in the recorded order Repeat key Use to switch the repeat mode 3 1 track Repeat All Repeat When 1 track Repeat is enabled the track currently played back is played back repeatedly When All Repeat is enabled tracks in the current track list are played back repeatedly List key Use to display the list of tracks currently selected Note This key is disabled while a shuffle mode is specified Option key Use to change the playback speed while playing the Audiobooks Information pane Play Pause icon gt IN display Track No AG Play mode 1 lt Song title Artist name Album title 2 E Progress 0 03 0 55 Volume indicator Remaining time Janet Jackson All For You Play time 1 Displays status of Repeat Shuffle play 12 1 track Repeat AO All Repeat 123 Song Shuffle AX Album Shuffle 2 The title display shows from top level down the Song title Artist name and Album title When a Podcast or Audiobooks which has two or more chapters is played back the chapter title and chapter number are displayed When the text is too long to be displayed it can be scrolled by touching the Information pane Pausing playback e This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Touch the gt MI key during playback Playback pauses 2 To r
138. d twice and the operation panel will start moving 2 When the operation panel is moved to your desired angle release the button The operation panel will stop Once you adjust the angle of the operation panel the operation panel will return to the adjusted angle even after it is open closed Returning the operation panel to the original angle 1 Keep pressing the OPEN CLOSE button It will Move and stop at 30 2 Keep pressing the OPEN CLOSE button again It will move and stop at 0 MAX983HD 13 jenuew S I3umg Switching the Operation Mode To switch between the Navigation screen and Audio screen press the D NAVI Navi AV button Turning the Audio OFF You can turn off all of the AV features 1 Keep pressing the SRC Source button more than 1 second The AV features are turned off Turning the Monitor OFF Turning the AV features on 1 Press the SRC Source button The AV features are turned on and the system resumes the last status of the AV features You can turn off the monitor screen and change it to a black screen 1 Keep pressing the Set button more than 1 second The monitor screen is turned off Adjusting the Volume 1 Press the Volume buttons to adjust the volume Increases the volume 7 Decreases the volume e The volume level indicated at the bottom of the screen is in a range from 0 min to 33 max Turning the monitor on
139. de Europese Unie of Zwitserland waar u de Database hebt verkregen van toepassing In alle andere gevallen of in het geval dat de plaats waar u de Database hebt aangeschaft niet bepaalbaar is is Nederlands recht van toepassing De bevoegde rechter in uw woonplaats op de dag van verkrijging van de Database is bevoegd geschillen die voortvloeien uit of samenhangen met deze Overeenkomst te beoordelen onverminderd het recht van NAVTEQ vorderingen voor te leggen aan de rechter van de plaats waar u ten tijde van het desbetreffende geschil woont Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 577 CONTRATO DE LICENCIA PARA USUARIOS FINALES ANTES DE UTILIZAR LA BASE DE DATOS NAVTEQ LEA DETENIDAMENTE EL PRESENTE CONTRATO DE LICENCIA PARA USUARIOS FINALES NOTIFICACI N PARA EL USUARIO EL PRESENTE ES UN CONTRATO DE LICENCIA Y NO UN CONTRATO DE COMPRAVENTA ENTRE USTED Y NAVTEQ B V POR SU EJEMPLAR DE LA BASE DE DATOS DE MAPAS DE NAVEGACION NAVTEQ CON INCLUSION DE LOS PROGRAMAS DE SOFTWARE CORRESPONDIENTES LOS MEDIOS PORTADORES DE INFORMACION Y LA DOCUMENTACION ACLARATORIA IMPRESA PUBLICADA POR NAVTEQ B V A DENOMINAR EN CONJUNTO LA BASE DE DATOS ALHACER USO DE SU EJEMPLAR DE LA BASE DE DATOS ACEPTA Y ESTA DE ACUERDO CON TODAS LAS CLAUSULAS DE ESTE CONTRATO DE LICENCIA PARA USUARIOS FINALES CONTRATO SI NO ESTA DE ACUERDO CON LAS CL USULAS DE ESTE CONTRATO DEVUELVA INMEDIATAMENTE A SU PROVEEDOR SU EJEMPLAR DE LA BASE DE
140. de l Union europ enne ou en Suisse si vous avez acquis la Base de donn es dans l un de ces pays Dans tous les autres cas ou si le pays dans lequel vous avez acquis la Base de donn es ne peut tre d termin le droit des Pays Bas sera applicable Le tribunal comp tent du ressort dans lequel vous r sidez le jour o vous avez fait acquisition de la Base de donn es sera seul comp tent pour tout litige d coulant de ou en relation avec ce contrat sans pr judice pour NAVTEQ du droit d intenter une action devant le tribunal du lieu de votre r sidence au moment du litige Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 573 CONTRATTO DI LICENZA ALL UTENTE FINALE LEGGERE ATTENTAMENTE IL PRESENTE CONTRATTO DI LICENZA PER L UTENTE FINALE PRIMA DI UTILIZZARE IL DATABASE NAVTEQ NOTA PER L UTENTE QUESTO E UN CONTRATTO DI LICENZA E NON UN CONTRATTO DI VENDITA FRA LEI UTENTE FINALE E LA NAVTEQ B V PER LA SUA COPIA DEL DATABASE DELLA MAPPA DI NAVIGAZIONE NAVTEQ COMPRENDENTE IL RELATIVO SOFTWARE PER COMPUTER SUPPORTI E LA DOCUMENTAZIONE STAMPATA ESPLICATIVA PUBBLICATA DA NAVTEQ NEL PROSIEGUO COLLETTIVAMENTE DENOMINATI IL DATABASE IN SEGUITO ALL UTILIZZO DEL DATABASE LEI CONVIENE E ACCETTA TUTTE LE CLAUSOLE E LE CONDIZIONI DEL PRESENTE CONTRATTO DI LICENZA PER L UTENTE FINALE CONTRATTO QUALORA LEI NON SIA D ACCORDO CON LE CLAUSOLE DI QUESTO CONTRATTO RESTITUISCA SENZA INDUGIO IL DATABASE UNITA
141. der key of the Scan item This operation scans and plays back the first tracks of all folders in the disc card the first 10 seconds for each e F SCN is displayed on the information pane Track scan playback Touch the Track key of the Scan item This operation scans and plays back all tracks recorded in the disc card the first 10 seconds for each e T SCN is displayed on the information pane Folder repeat playback Touch the Folder key of the Repeat item e This operation plays back tracks in the current folder repeatedly e F RPT is displayed on the information pane 1 track repeat playback Touch the 1 Track key of the Repeat item This operation plays back the current track repeatedly e T RPT is displayed on the information pane All track random playback Touch the All Track key of the Random item e This operation plays back tracks recorded in the disc card in no particular order e T RDM is displayed on the information pane 1 folder random playback Touch the 1 Folder key of the Random item e This operation plays the tracks in the current folder in a random order e F RDM is displayed on the information pane ade wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Audio CD Operations This system can display the track information Album title Track title Artist name and Genre of the currently played disc by using the Album Information data sto
142. dil a Datab zi Ve v ech dal ch p padech nebo nem e li b t definov na jurisdikce kde jste si po dil a Datab zi uplatn se z kony Nizozemska Soudy kompetentn v m st Va eho pobytu v dob kdy jste si po dil a Datab zi Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 589 LOPPUKAYTTAJAN K YTT OIKEUSSOPIMUS T M K YTT OIKEUSSOPIMUS ON LUETTAVA HUOLELLISESTI ENNEN NAVTEQ TIETOKANNAN K YTT TIEDOKSI K YTT J LLE N m T M ON KAYTTAJAN JA NAVTEQ B V N V LINEN K YTT OIKEUSSOPIMUS El MYYNTISOPIMUS JOKA KOSKEE K YTT J N HANKKIMAA TIEKARTTATIETOKANNAN KOPIOTA MUKAAN LUKIEN SIIHEN KUULUVA TIETOKONEOHJELMISTO TIETOV LINEET JA NAVTEQIN JULKAISEMA KIRJALLINEN OPASTUSAINEISTO YHDESS TIETOKANTA K YTT M LL TIETOKANTAA K YTT J HYV KSYY KAIKKI T M N LOPPUK YTT J N K YTT OIKEUSSOPIMUKSEN SOPIMUS EHDOT JOS K YTT J EI HYV KSY T M N SOPIMUKSEN EHTOJA H NEN ON V LITT M STI PALAUTETTAVA TIETOKANTA KOKONAISUUDESSAAN J LLEENMYYJ LLE HYVITYST VASTAAN OMISTUSOIKEUS Tietokanta sek siihen liittyv t tekij noikeudet ja immateriaalioikeudet tai muut l hioikeudet ovat NAVTEQin tai sen lisenssinantajien omaisuutta Tietov lineet jotka sis lt v t tietokannan pysyv t NAVTEQin ja tai ohjelmistotoimittajan omistuksessa kunnes k ytt j on suorittanut NAVTEQille ja tai ohjelmistotoimittajalle koko summan jonka t m sopimus tai muut vastaavat sopimuk
143. displayed pressing the NAVI Navi AV button displays the AV mode menu screen of the current source mode Each source mode has the own AV mode menu and its menu items and their functions differ depending on the source mode For detailed explanation on the AV mode menu of each source mode see the corresponding section As an example the AV mode menu screen of the Tuner mode is shown below Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals AV Shortcut menus When the Map screen of the current location is displayed touching the AV key displayed at bottom left of the screen displays the AV Shortcut menu of the current source mode on top of the Map screen Each source mode except for the AUX mode has the own AV Shortcut menu and its menu items and their functions differ depending on the source mode For detailed explanation on the AV mode menu of each source mode see the corresponding section As an example the AV Shortcut menu screen of the Tuner mode is shown below jenuew saumo 0 00 When an AV operation is performed in the Navigation mode audio information concerning the selected station chapter track etc is displayed for a while at the bottom of the screen Recent Album menu The recorded Albums recently selected from the Music Search are displayed on the Recent Album menu and you can play them back by an easy operation To display the Recent Album menu touch the 229 key on the Music Search screen
144. do os meios considerados razo veis incluindo os custos que ser o determinados pela NAVTEQ TRANSFER NCIA DE LICEN A N o permitida a transfer ncia da Base de Dados a terceiros excepto nos casos em que a mesma se encontre instalada no sistema para o qual foi criada ou em que o cliente n o conserve qualquer c pia da Base de Dados para si e na medida em que o transmiss rio expresse o seu consentimento em rela o a todos os termos e condi es do presente Acordo e o confirme por escrito NAVTEQ Os conjuntos de multi discos somente poder o ser transferidos ou vendidos como um conjunto completo tal como fornecidos pela NAVTEQ e n o como um subconjunto daquele GARANTIA LIMITADA A NAVTEQ oferece a garantia de que sujeita s Advert ncias abaixo descritas e por um per odo de 12 meses ap s ter adquirido a sua c pia da Base de Dados a mesma ir funcionar substancialmente de acordo com os Crit rios de Exactid o e Integralidade da NAVTEQ existentes data de aquisi o da Base de Dados sendo que estes crit rios podem ser disponibilizados pela NAVTEQ mediante solicita o do utilizador No caso de a Base de Dados n o funcionar de acordo com a presente garantia limitada a NAVTEQ realizar os esfor os que se afigurem adequados para proceder repara o ou apar nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD substituig o da c pia da Base de Dados que n o esteja a funcionar devidamente Se os referidos esforc
145. e lt lt key starts playback from the beginning of the current chapter When touching this key again within about 3 seconds playback starts from the beginning of the previous chapter e The I lt and gt gt I Search buttons can also be used instead of the Chapter keys DVD Video Operations on titles searching Showing the DVD video mode screen touch the Title key during playback Titles are skipped as many as the times touching the key and playback starts Touching the A key starts playback from the beginning of the next title e Touching the v key starts playback from the beginning of the previous title Searching with a chapter title number You can locate the beginning of a scene using the chapter numbers or title numbers recorded on the DVD Video disc This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Showing the DVD video mode screen touch the Option key 2 Touch the Search key The Key Pad screen appears with the chapter number input mode Touching the Title key turns the Key Pad to the title number input mode Title A large segment to divide the data area of the disc Chapter A small segment to divide the data area of the Title 3 Input the number of the title chapter that you want to play back with the 0 to 9 key 4 Touch the OK key Playback starts from the scene of the input title number or chapter number If the input ti
146. e TMC event list is displayed in order of distance from the current location You can confirm the detailed information by a similar way as for the Traffic Info on Route key Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Displaying traffic information on the map You can confirm the information of all the TMC traffic information symbols displayed on the map 1 Touch the Traffic Info on Map key lt 1 D Moves the TMC traffic information symbol on the map and switches to detailed information of other events Note To display the TMC traffic information on the map touch the TMC Traffic Info Settings key and set the Traffic Info on Map to ON gt Setting TMC traffic information P 40 Displaying TMC information on the weather 1 Touch the Weather key The TMC event list about weather is displayed in order of distance from the current location You can confirm the detailed information by a similar way as for the Traffic Info on Route key Detailed information is not displayed for events without information about the weather Displaying congestion forecast information 1 Touch the Traffic Forecast key The TMC event list with congestion forecast information is displayed You can confirm the detailed information by a similar way as for the Traffic Info on Route key MAX983HD 39 Displaying the Traffic Information Displaying traffic information on the registered user location 1 Touch
147. e displayed Music Catcher Music Catcher mode gt P 40 SD Card SD Card mode gt P 33 When no SD card is set in the SD card MP3 WMA mode slot NO MEMORY CARD will be displayed TV 1 TV Tuner mode Available only when the TV tuner unit is connected via CeNET AUX AUX mode Available only when the TV tuner is not connected via CeNET iPod 1 iPod mode Available only when the iPod is connected Telephone 1 Telephone mode Available only when the Bluetooth Interface Box is connected via CeNET 1 These Source keys are displayed only when the corresponding device is connected to this unit loaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 2Zone Function About the 2Zone Function Setting the 2Zone function The 2Zone function is a function that assigns e The factory default setting is off separate source output to the Front zone this 1 Press the SRC Source button to display the unit and Rear zone the optional rear monitor by Source menu screen E simultaneously playing two sources in this 2 Touch the 2Zone key to turn the 2Zone system Therefore the rear passengers are function on m allowed to enjoy a different video source from the The zone select keys are displayed at right of 3 source played on the monitor of this unit the 2Zone key The source sounds of the Front zone are 2 3 Touch the desired Source key you wish to assign for the Rear
148. e guidance voice setting to ON Voice guidance on Activate the voice guidance Sets the route guidance voice setting to OFF Voice guidance off Deactivate the voice guidance Increases the volume of the guidance voice Voice guidance Volume up Decreases the volume of the guidance voice Voice guidance Volume down Repeats the immediately previous voice Repeat voice guidance guidance erpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Notes on the Voice Command Operations When operating the system by voice it is After the announcement request to say necessary to reduce the surrounding noises to commands is heard say commands during the be recognised correctly Follow the following blue bar is displayed on the voice input guidelines listening time indication bar The system e Close the windows returns to the previous screen when the blue Say commands clearly and correctly toward bar runs out the microphone Voice commands may not be recognised Refrain from other conversations while correctly Use it as an assistance for the voice input system operation only Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 61 Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy RDS TMC The provider of RDS TMC is not automatically selected The aerial is not connected Confirm the connection of the aerial Manual is selected on the Select T
149. e input wait mode Back Displays the next page of voice command list displayed on the screen Next page Displays the previous page of voice command list displayed on the screen Previous page Displays the screen displayed when touching the 687 key Voice Help screen Voice Help What can say Voice commands for changing the operation modes Operation Command Turns on the AV features Audio On Turns off the AV features Audio Off Switches to the Tuner mode Radio Switches to the DVD CD mode DVD Player or CD Player Switches to the Music Catcher mode Music catcher Switches to the SD Card mode SD card player Switches to the AUX mode AUX Switches to the iPod mode iPod Voice commands for controlling Tuner features Operation Command Performs seek tuning Seek up down Recalls a preset station Preset 1 2 3 4 5 6 Preset up down Hpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy General Power does not turn on No sound is produced Fuse is blown Replace with a fuse of the same amperage Ifthe fuse blows again consult your store of purchase Incorrect wiring Consult your store of purchase Nothing happens when bu
150. e nebo rady poskytnut ze strany NAVTEO Va eho dodavatele nebo jak koli jin osoby netvo z ruku ani dn m zp sobem neroz i uj rozsah omezen z ruky v e popsan Omezen z ruka stanoven v t to Smlouv se nedot k ani nen k jm jak chkoli statut rn ch z konn ch pr v amp grnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD kter m ete mit ze z konn ho ru en proti skryt m vad m Pokud jste nenabyl a Datab zi od NAVTEO p mo m ete m t z konn statut rn pr va v i osob od n jste Datab zi nabyl a dodatkem ke zde uveden m pr v m zaru ovan m spole nost NAVTEO podle z kona Va jurisdikce V e uveden z ruka spole nosti NAVTEO se nedotkne takov ch z konn ch pr v a m ete takov pr va uplat ovat dodatkem k z ru n m pr v m zde ud len m OMEZEN ODPOV DNOSTI Cena Datab ze nezahrnuje dn protipln n za uva ovan rizika n sledn ch nep m ch nebo neomezen ch p m ch kod kter mohou vzniknout v souvislosti s Va m u v n m Datab ze Spole nost NAVTEQ tud v dn m p pad nenese odpov dnost za jak koli n sledn nebo nep m kody zejm na u l p jmy daje nebo u it utrp n V mi nebo jakoukoli t et stranou kter vypl vaj z Va eho u v n Datab ze at ji p i alob ze smlouvy nebo deliktu nebo na z klad z ruky a to i tehdy byla li spole nost NAVTEO vyrozum n
151. e right to grant sub licenses LICENSE GRANT NAVTEQ grants you a non exclusive license to use the Database for your personal use or if applicable for use in your business internal operations This license does not include the right to grant sub licenses LIMITATIONS ON USE The Database is restricted for use in the specific system for which it was created Except to the extent explicitly permitted by mandatory laws e g national laws based on the European Software Directive 91 250 and the Database Directive 96 9 you may not extract or reutilize substantial parts of the contents of the Database nor reproduce copy modify adapt translate disassemble decompile reverse engineer any portion of the Database If you wish to obtain interoperability information as meant in the national laws based on the European Software Directive you shall grant NAVTEQ reasonable opportunity to provide said information on reasonable terms including costs to be determined by NAVTEG TRANSFER OF LICENSE You may not transfer the Database to third parties except when installed in the system for which it was created or when you do not retain any copy of the Database and provided that the transferee agrees to all terms and conditions of this Agreement and confirms this in writing to NAVTEQ Multi disc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided by NAVTEQ and not as subset thereof LIMITED WARRANTY NAVTEQ warrants that subject to
152. e speed and are correctly detected by displaying the connection check screen see the Navigation System Check section of the Navigation Manual Engine control computer EC EC vehicle speed signal cable Speed sensor connection lead gw waloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Wire Connection WARNING Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before connecting wires otherwise an electric shock injury by short circuit may occur Be sure to read the section Wire Connection Notes before installation or connection operations Note For the optional devices use the RCA pin cable and other connector cables sold separately een Vehicle signal lead non Speed sensor lead a Pink Connect to the EC Engine Control Computer vehicle speed signal line Parking brake signal lead Connect to the parking brake signal line Reverse gear signal lead Purple White Connect to the terminal for the reverse gear lamp that is only fed when the transmission is put in reverse Grass green iPod connector J cable I O GPS antenna m RDS TMC antenna terminal Power supply CCD camera terminal lead TN oj Refer to the following figure IR remote controller sensor CeNET terminal
153. e turn list Turns on the traffic information display on the map screen Show traffic information Traffic information on Turns off the traffic information display on the map screen Voice commands for changing the map scale Hide traffic information Traffic information off Say Change zoom level Change scale then say the following command Operation Command Increases decreases the map scale by one step Zoom in out Changes to the specified map scale XX m scale XX mile scale Changes the map scale to minimum Minimum scale Changes the map scale to maximum Maximum scale Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 59 MAX983HD List of the Voice Commands Navigation Features O Voice commands for entering destination Say Find Destination then say the following command Operation Command Sets the home address as the destination My Home Go Return to my home Set destination to my home Enters from the Address Book From Address Book Enters from the Nearby POI From Nearby POI Enters from the Previous Destinations From Previous destination Voice commands for setting voice guidance These are the commands to change settings of the voice guidance during route guidance Operation Command Sets the rout
154. ected programme type into the preset channel memory e The 29 types of PTY listed below can be selected PTY item ENGLISH Contents News News Affairs Current Affairs Info Information Sport Sport Educate Education Drama Drama Culture Culture Science Science Varied Varied Pop M Pop Music Rock M Rock Music Easy M Easy Listening Music Light M Light Classical Music Classics Serious Classical Music Other M Other Music Weather Weather PTY item Finance Finance Children Children s Programmes Social Social Affairs Religion Religion Phone In Phone In Travel Travel Leisure Leisure Jazz Jazz Music Country Country Music Nation M National Music Oldies Oldies Music Folk M Folk Music Document Documentary Emergency broadcast If an emergency broadcast is received all the function mode operations are stopped Alarm appears on the screen and the emergency broadcast can be heard O Cancelling an emergency broadcast 1 Touch the TA key The emergency broadcast reception is cancelled Volume setting of TA emergency broadcast Alarm and PTY The volume for TA Alarm and PTY interrupts can be set during TA Alarm or PTY interrupt The factory default setting is 15 1 Use the and Volume buttons to set the volume to the desired level 00 to 33 during a TA Alarm or PTY interrupt e When
155. ed including the music data in the Music Catcher It is recommended that you backup all data you want to keep Reset to Factory Setting When touching the Reset key a screen with confirmation message appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen Software amp Map Update You can update the software and the map data Software amp Map Update When touching the Start key a screen with a message prompting to insert the update disc appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen Screen Adjustment The position and sharpness of the screen can be adjusted Screen Adjustment After touching the Adjust key adjust the screen position by touching the lt A gt and v key Touch the 1 or 2 key to select a setting at which the screen is displayed clearly Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Setting Safety Camera From the Safety Camera menu you can set the Safety Camera 1 Touch the gt gt Next key from the Setting menu 2 Touch the Safety Camera key to display the Safety Camera menu 3 Touch the desired menu item to set Show Icon on Map Turns ON OFF the Safety Camera Icon display on the map Warning amp Sound Turns ON OFF both of the warning indication and alarm sound when the vehicle gets near a Safety Camera location Camera Location Touch the List key to display the list of the Safety Camera locations
156. ed routes You can perform the following operations from this screen according to the situation Note If approx 30 seconds pass without touching any key after this screen is displayed the route guidance will be automatically started Start key Starts the route guidance to the destination More Routes key You can change to other suggested routes with a different priority condition You can also set this from the Route menu Selecting another route P 35 Shortest Time Shows the route of which the required driving time is shortest Minimize M way Shows the route of which motorways are not used as much as possible Shortest Distance Shows the route of which the distance is shortest OK Changes to the specified route Route Info key Shows the information of the suggested route selected on the screen e Preview You can confirm the route from the map Touching the PPI key scrolls the map so that the cursor moves along the travelling direction of the suggested route Touching the 144 key scrolls the map so that the cursor moves to the opposite direction of travelling along the suggested route Touching the II key stops scrolling temporarily Rgwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Setting the Destination and Starting the Route Guidance Simulation Starts the simulation of the route guidance with moving the vehicle mark automatically Touching the
157. ehicle position Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Changing Skin You can change the screen design by using the skin data stored in the hard disk drive Note This operation is disabled while recording a CD or loading ejecting a disc 1 Touch the Select key of the Skin Change item 2 Touch the desired item key you wish to set Beep Sound You can turn ON OFF the beep sounds and menu operation sounds Keyboard Type You can change the keyboard layout used for name entry 1 Touch the item key of the Keyboard item 2 Select the keyboard type by touching one of the following keys ABCDEF key QWERTY key QWERTZ key AZERTY key Voice Recognition You can turn ON OFF the voice recognition feature optional When you touch the OFF key the voice recognition is not available Voice Feedback You can turn ON OFF the voice feedbacks which are responded when using voice commands System Information You can confirm the version number of the map data and the system software here 1 Touch the Info key The system information is displayed Other General Settings See the Audio Manual for the details of the following settings Blinking LED Security Mode System Check System Information Antenna MAX983HD 43 Navigation Settings When you touch the Navigation key from the Setting menu you can set various settings or confirm the infor
158. eller p noen m te utvide omfanget av den begrensede garantien beskrevet ovenfor Den begrensede garantien gitt idenne AVTALEN p virker ikke og er uten noen prejudise for de eventuelle lovfestede juridiske rettigheter du m tte ha under den juridiske garantien mot skjulte ggg nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD defekter Hvis du ikke kjopte Databasen direkte fra NAVTEQ kan du ha lovfestede rettigheter i forhold til den personen du kjopte Databasen fra i tillegg til de rettigheter NAVTEQ har gitt deg med dette dokumentet i henhold til lovverket i din rettskrets Ovenst ende garanti fra NAVTEQ skal ikke p virke slike lovfestede rettigheter og du skal ha rett til gj re dem gjeldende i tillegg til de garantirettigheter du har f tt i dette dokumentet ANSVARSBEGRENSNING Prisen p Databasen inkluderer ingen hensyntagen til overtagelse av erstatningsansvar for f lgeskader indirekte skader eller ubegrensede direkte skader som m tte oppst i forbindelse med din bruk av Databasen F lgelig skal NAVTEQ under ingen omstendigheter ha erstatningsansvar for noen f lgeskader eller indirekte skader inkludert uten begrensning tap av inntekt data eller bruk som m tte ramme deg eller en eventuell tredjepart som f lge av bruken av Databasen det v re seg i kontraktsmessige eller ikke kontraktsmessige forhold uaktsomhet eller basert p en garanti selv om NAVTEQ er blitt informert om muligheten for et slikt skadeansvar I a
159. em The Erase Code screen appears 2 Enter your 4 digit Personal Code by using Ten Key pad then touch the OK key The message Code erased appears and it will return to the previous screen Personal Code entry The Personal Code screen will be displayed when turning the power on after performing the following operations e The car battery was replaced e The backup power was cut off e The Reset button was pressed Note If you forgot your Personal Code please consult your dealer or an authorized service centre pvnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD General Settings 1 Enter your Personal Code currently set When the correct Personal Code is entered the unit will restart from the initial startup screen Note When you enter a wrong Personal Code the message Code incorrect is displayed and the Personal Code entry is prohibited for a while This prohibited time is changed according to the number of times of wrong code entry as follows 1 to 6 times 15 seconds 7 times or more 15 minutes System Check You can check the connection status of the iPod and Bluetooth Interface Box Note This operation is disabled while recording a CD or loading ejecting a disc 1 Touch the Check key of the System Check item The System Check screen is displayed and connection statuses are shown 2 Touch the Check key to perform system check A confirmation screen appears
160. en Key pad 1 Touch the 10Keys key to display the Ten Key pad screen 2 Enterthe telephone number by using the Ten Key pad displayed on the screen 3 Touch the E key to call the entered number e The following Telephone Interrupt screen is displayed during phone call 00 00 03 Private Mic Mute 16 29 MAX983HD 57 jenuew saumo jenuew 5 19UMQ Telephone Operations e Touch the Private key to talk using the mobile phone cancelling the hands free function To return to the hands free mode touch the HFS key e Touch the Mic Mute key to turn off the microphone so that the sound does not be heard by the partner 4 When the call is finished touch the EH key to hang up The display returns to the Telephone mode screen Note Depending on the mobile phone the Telephone Interrupt screen may be closed and the connection with the Interface Box may be disconnected when entering the Private mode Redialling 1 Touch the Redial key to call the last dialled number The Telephone Interrupt screen is displayed and calling starts e When the call is finished touch the E key to hang up Note When the dialed telephone number cannot be transfered from the mobile phone Unknown is displayed instead of the number Using the Phone Book The system will capture the phone book data registered in the selected mobile phone You can use it to make a call from this unit Note So
161. en a destination is already set you can set the location of the ig as a waypoint Specify the order of passing when setting the location as a waypoint Editing the route P 33 Nearby POI key You can search for a place of the specified category around the location of the zg and set it as the destination The searching procedure is similar to the procedure for POI search By Nearby PO P 23 POI Info key When the navigation system has information concerning the searched location you can display this information by pressing the POI Info key Store Location key Register the location found to the Address Book gt key Touching this key changes the map to the map scrolling screen You can adjust the location of the searched place Note The name of the road close to the cursor is displayed at the bottom of the screen For the 2D maps the road that will be set as destination blinks when the map scale is 200 m 1 8 mile or smaller When you set the following places as the destination confirm the position of the blinking road Place where roads of ascending and descending have diverged Place near the intersection of overpass e Place where no road exists in the vicinity Set Route menu Er Set Route Start x Y More Routes ED Route Info Add Way Pt FE 2 42 292km When you enter the destination the Set Route menu is displayed with the map showing the suggest
162. ent information icon display for each event type The factory settings are all ON You can set this for the following types of TMC traffic information event symbols All Traffic Information Accident amp Incident Traffic Status Roadworks Closure amp Restrictions Weather amp Road Info Information Traffic Forecast Weather Select TMC Provider You can select the TMC provider you want to use e Automatic Uses the provider automatically selected Manual Uses the provider you select from the list of providers Note For the TMC provider setting we recommend to set to Automatic Setting TA Traffic Announcement mode 1 Touch the TA key TA will be displayed at the bottom of the screen and the system enters the TA standby mode For the detailed information on the TA standby mode see Radio Operations Audio Manual Atpnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Displaying the Traffic Information TMC urgent information indication When the system receives a TMC information of high urgency located within 10km from the vehicle position or within 50km on the route the system displays the high urgency information automatically with a priority higher than any other screen To return to the Map screen touch the OK key eid TMC Urgent Traffic Info Warning In 31km On All Autoroute du Nord Accident OK Please push OK to dismiss message
163. er tales derechos en adici n a los derechos de garant a concedidos aqu LIMITACI N DE LA RESPONSABILIDAD El precio de la Base de datos no incluye la cobertura por riesgo de da os consecuenciales indirectos o da os directos ilimitados derivados del uso que usted hace de la Base de datos Por tanto en ning n caso NAVTEQ asumir responsabilidad alguna por da os consecuenciales o indirectos incluyendo sin limitaci n los perjuicios por lucro cesante p rdida de datos o falta de uso derivados del uso de la Base de datos en que incurra usted o un tercero ya sea en acci n contractual il cita o en virtud de una garant a incluso si NAVTEQ hubiese sido notificada de la posibilidad de que ocurriesen dichos perjuicios En cualquier caso la responsabilidad de NAVTEQ por da os directos estar limitado al precio de su ejemplar de la Base de datos LA LIMITACI N DE LA GARANT A Y LA LIMITACI N DE LA RESPONSABILIDAD TAL COMO CONSTAN EN EL PRESENTE CONTRATO NO AFECTAN O PERJUDICAN SUS DERECHOS LEGALES ESTATUTARIOS EN CASO DE HABER ADQUIRIDO LA BASE DE DATOS EN FORMA DIFERENTE A LA EXPLOTACI N DE UNA EMPRESA ADVERTENCIAS La Base de datos reproduce la realidad tal como sta exist a previa a la fecha en que usted la ha adquirido y comprende informaci n y datos provenientes de la administraci n p blica y de otras fuentes los cuales pueden contener errores u omisiones En consecuencia la Base de datos puede incluir informaci n incorrec
164. erenanenenanenannnennnenennnnnnnnnnnnenannnenennnenenensnnnnnenennnnnnnnnennennnnnennnenanenennnnnnnnnnnnnenensene 3 Safety Precautions sise 3 About This Manual sera en na ernennen dier 4 Notes on Handling stra sinensis ee een nie 4 CONTENTS cli iaia onto ls 5 Basic Operations AAA A 6 Switching the Operation Mode ii 6 Menu Types and Operation sise 6 Map Screen Features iii 10 Manipulating the Map Screen 16 Outline of Destination Entering Procedures era 19 Entering the Destination sense 22 Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu 22 Searching Your Destination from the Map Screen 26 Searching for POI Using the Quick POI Function erne eee 26 Searching Your Destination from the Favourite Freguent List 27 Setting the Destination and Starting the Route Guidance nnen 28 Route Guidance AAA iii 30 Route Guidance Screen Features 30 About the Voice Guidance ii 32 Changing Editing the Route Settings nen 32 Notes on the Route Guidance ss 36 Notes on the Voice Guidance renare sera RR renarna nt 37 Traffic Information PPERERRERPREEPERPFEERFEEERERRRPEFFERREFERREFEREREFFEEEBFEEFEHRFEFEFFEREUREFEREFEFFEREEFFEREFERFFRSERR 38 Displaying the Traffic Information 38 Notes on the Traffic Information 41 System Settings iii 42 General Settings cura 43 Navigation Setting
165. esume playback touch the gt 11 key again Playback resumes Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD iPod Operations Spo a track searching Touch the ke or gt gt key during playback Tracks are skipped as many as the times the button is pressed and playback starts Touching the gt gt key starts playback from the beginning of the next track Touching the I lt key starts playback from the beginning of the current track When this key is touched again within about 2 seconds playback starts from the beginning of the previous track When a Podcast or Audiobooks which has two or more chapters is played back touching the ke or gt gt key while pausing moves the current location to the beginning of the previous or next chapter You can also use the I lt and gt gt Search buttons or the Track keys on the AV Shortcut menu screen instead of the ke and gt gt keys Fast forward and fast backward 1 Touch and hold the lt lt or gt gt key during playback The playback speed becomes faster Releasing the key resumes the normal speed playback e You can also use the I lt and gt gt Search buttons or the Track keys on the AV Shortcut menu screen instead of the ke and gt gt keys Track List operation Touching the List key displays the following Track List screen The tracks to be played back are listed in this screen 58 Track Li
166. ew key 3 Search the area to avoid by a similar way as for entering a destination The setting screen of the Avoid Area is displayed with the map of area found 4 Touch the desired menu item to set Rename You can change the name of the Avoid Area Enter the name then touch the OK key Resize Area You can change the size of the Avoid Area in 5 steps Touch the Large 4 Medium w or Small key M way You can set whether to avoid motorways passing the Avoid Area included Avoided not included Not avoided Delete Delete the current Avoid Area O You can correct the location of the Avoid Area by moving the cursor on the map 5 Touch the OK key To edit an Avoid Area 1 Touch the Avoid Area Settings key 2 Touch the Avoid Area you wish to edit 3 Touch the desired menu item to set and setit by a similar way as for registering Avoid Areas Step 4 above 4 Touch the OK key MAX983HD 45 Navigation Settings TMC Traffic Information Settings 1 Touch the TMC Traffic Info Settings key The TMC Traffic Info Setting menu screen is displayed For details ofthe TMC settings see Setting TMC traffic information P 40 Tracking Display Settings The system can display track data for one trip from ACC ON to OFF from the place of departure up to a distance of 100 km on the map The track from the current location up to 20 km can be registered for up to five
167. f r das sie entwickelt worden ist Soweit durch zwingendes Recht nicht ausdr cklich gestattet z B nationale Gesetze auf Grundlage der europ ischen Software Richtlinie 91 250 EWG oder der Datenbank Richtlinie 96 9 EG sind Sie weder berechtigt wesentliche Teile des Inhalts der Datenbank zu extrahieren oder weiter zu verwenden noch Teile der Datenbank zu vervielf ltigen zu kopieren zu modifizieren anzupassen zu bersetzen zu zerlegen zu dekompilieren oder mittels Reverse Engineering zur ckzuentwickeln Falls Sie Informationen ber Interoperabilit t gem den nationalen Gesetzen die auf Grundlage der europ ischen Software Richtlinie erlassen worden sind erhalten m chten sind Sie verpflichtet NAVTEQ angemessene Gelegenheit zu geben Ihnen diese Informationen zu angemessenen von NAVTEA festzulegenden Bedingungen und Kosten zur Verf gung zu stellen LIZENZ BERTRAGUNG Sie sind zu einer bertragung der Datenbank an Dritte nicht berechtigt Dies gilt nicht wenn die Datenbank auf dem System f r das sie entwickelt worden ist installiert ist oder wenn Sie keinerlei Kopien der Datenbank zur ckbehalten vorausgesetzt dass der Empf nger der Datenbank sich schriftlich gegen ber NAVTEQ mit s mtlichen Bestimmungen dieses Vertrages einverstanden erkl rt Die CD S tze d rfen nur als kompletter Satz wie von NAVTEQ bereitgestellt nicht aber in Teilen weitergegeben oder verkauft werden BESCHR NKTE GEW HRLEISTUNG NAVTEQ gew
168. feller din leverandor i overensstemmelse med denne Avtalen eller tilsvarende avtale r om levering av varen til deg TILDELING AV LISENS NAVTEQ tildeler deg en lisens uten enerett for din personlige bruk av Databasen eller hvis relevant for intern bruk av den i ditt foretak Denne lisensen omfatter ikke noen rett til tildele underlisenser BRUKSBEGRENSNINGER Databasens bruk er begrenset til det bestemte systemet den ble opprettet for Unntatt i den utstrekning det eksplisitt tillates av de regelverk man er p lagt forholde seg til dvs nasjonale lovverk basert p det europeiske programvaredirektivet 91 250 og Databasedirektivet 96 9 har du ikke rett til trekke ut eller gjore ny bruk av vesentlige deler av innholdet i Databasen og heller ikke reprodusere kopiere endre tilpasse oversette demontere eller dekompilere den eller ta fra hverandre programkoden i noen del av Databasen Hvis du onsker oppn samspillinformasjon i den betydningen som fremg r av de nasjonale lover basert p det europeiske programvaredirektivet skal du gi NAVTEO rimelig anledning til amp fremskaffe slik informasjon p fornuftige vilk r inkludert priser som skal fastsettes av NAVTEQ OVERFORING AV LISENS Du har ikke rett til overf re Databasen til tredjeparter unntatt n r den er installert i det systemet den ble opprettet for eller n r du selv ikke beholder noen kopi av Databasen og under forutsetning av at den du overf rer den til god
169. formation 3 Pop M Pop music 4 Sport Sport 5 Classics Classics 6 Easy M Easy listening music 4 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen O Cancelling PTY standby mode 1 Touch the Option key 2 Touch the OFF key of the PTY item PTY goes off and the PTY standby mode is cancelled O Cancelling PTY interrupt broadcast 1 Touch the TA key during receiving the PTY interrupt broadcast The PTY interrupt is cancelled and the system returns to PTY standby mode The TA key is also provided on the RDS TMC menu screen displayed by pressing the j INFO button MAX983HD 23 jenuew 5 12UMQ Radio Operations PTY seek 1 Touch the Option key 2 Touch the Preset or Item key of the PTY Select item 3 Touch your desired Programme Type key 4 Touch a Seek key Ifyou touch the A key or gt gt button this unit seeks a PTY broadcast moving up the frequencies If you touch the v key or lt lt button it seeks moving down the frequencies If no station with the selected PTY broadcast can be received the unit returns to the previous mode PTY preset memory 1 Touch the Option key 2 Touch the Item key of PTY Select item The PTY select mode is turned on 3 Touch your desired Programme Type key to select 4 Touch the Preset key to display the Preset screen Keep touching your desired Preset key on the Preset screen more than 2 seconds to store the sel
170. g besteht f r s mtliche Anspr che aus s mtlichen Rechtsgr nden gleich ob aus Vertrag unerlaubter Handlung oder Gew hrleistung Dar ber hinaus ist die Haftung von NAVTEQ f r unmittelbare Sch den in jedem Fall auf die H he des von Ihnen f r Ihre Kopie der Datenbank bezahlten Kaufpreises beschr nkt SOWEIT SIE DIE DATENBANK NICHT IM RAHMEN EINER GESCH FTSTRANSAKTION ERWORBEN HABEN L SST DIE IN DIESEM VERTRAG FESTGELEGTE BESCHR NKTE GEW HRLEISTUNG UND HAFTUNGSBESCHR NKUNG IHRE GESETZLICHEN RECHTE UNBER HRT WARNUNG Die Datenbank gibt die Wirklichkeit wieder wie sie vor Ihrem Erwerb der Datenbank bestanden hat und enth lt Daten und Informationen von staatlichen und anderen Quellen die Fehler oder Auslassungen aufweisen k nnen Die Datenbank kann daher wegen nderungen die im Lauf der Zeit eingetreten sind wegen ge nderter Umst nde oder der Art der genutzten Quellen ungenaue oder unvollst ndige Informationen enthalten Die Datenbank enth lt keinerlei Informationen ber unter anderem die Sicherheit der Umgebung Verf gbarkeit und Anwesenheit der Polizei Hilfe im Notfall Bauarbeiten Absperrungen von Stra en und Spuren Fahrzeugtyp oder Geschwindigkeitsbeschr nkungen Stra engef lle oder Stra enneigungen Br ckenh hen Gewichts oder andere Beschr nkungen Stra en oder Verkehrsbedingungen besondere Ereignisse Verkehrsstaus oder Reisezeiten GELTENDES RECHT Dieser Vertrag unterliegt jener Rechtsprechung
171. gendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zust ndigen Beh rden entnommen Based upon Crown Copyright material Copyright 2003 Top Map Ltd La Banca Dati Italiana stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Copyright 2000 Norwegian Mapping Authority EuroGeographics Source IgeoE Portugal EuroGeographics Informaci n geogr fica propiedad del CNIG Based upon electronic data O National Land Survey Sweden Topografische Grundlage O Bundesamt f r Landestopographie Publisher Clarion Co Ltd http www clarion com Manufacturer ZENRIN CO LTD ZENRIN EUROPE B V 2007 ZENRIN CO LTD ALL Rights Reserved 1993 2007 NAVTEQ All rights reserved OGeographia Corporation amp pirnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Map Coverage Detailed Country Coverage Austria 100 0 Belgium Netherlands Luxemburg 100 0 Denmark 100 0 Finland 100 0 France Andorra Monaco 100 0 Germany 100 0 Western Ireland 100 0 Europe Italy San Marino Vatican city state 100 0 Norway 100 0 Portugal 100 0 Spain 100 0 Sweden 100 0 Switzerland Liechtenstein 100 0 United Kingdom 100 0 Croatia 41 0 Czech Republic 54 0 Bulgaria 14 0 Estonia 29 0 Greece 43 0 Eastern Hungary 42 0 Europe Latvia 32 0 Lithuania 16 0 Poland 32 0 Roma
172. h Interface Box is connected to this unit via CeNET The following functions are available Listening to your telephone calls on the car speakers Making a call using the Ten Key pad screen or using the Phone Book or Dialled Received Missed calls records in the selected mobile phone w telephone number is registered 3 Note E 2 mobile phone Making a call from the POI Information screen or from the Edit screen of the Address Book if the Depending on a mobile phone you may need to perform the operation of the Object Push transfer on the Some mobile phones may not be able to transfer the Phone Book and record data The Phone Book and record data transmission may take a long time The operations of sending calls are disabled during the data transmission Selecting the Telephone mode 1 Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen 2 Touch the Telephone key to select the Telephone mode The system changes to the Telephone mode and the Telephone mode screen is displayed You can also select the Telephone mode from the Destination menu screen by touching the Telephone key Note When the 2Zone function is turned on touching the Telephone key cancels the 2Zone function Telephone mode screen E Telephone lt FOMA M1000 gt Phone Book Redial Missed Calls Dialled Numbers Received Calls 10Keys Phone Select Phone Settings Phone Book Redial Note The key
173. h na cest nap klad v ku a ku most a tunel ani dn dal obecn informace o podm nk ch j zdy a silnic V dy se proto spol hejte na vlastn sudek a idi sk zku enosti a respektujte aktu ln dopravn situaci Sna te se sledovat displej za j zdy co nejm n ge nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD BezpeCnostn pokyny Varovanie Tento naviga ny system by nemal nahr dzat v s vlastny sudok Bez ohl adu na to aku trasu tento naviga ni system navrhne musite vzdy dodrZiavat dopravn predpisy riadit sa vlastn m sudkom a dodr iava z sady bezpe n ho riadenia vozidla V pr pade Ze naviga n syst m navrhne trasu na ktorej by ste museli urobit riskantn man ver alebo man ver v rozpore s dopravn mi predpismi dostali sa do nebezpe nej situ cie alebo by v s trasa zaviedla do oblasti ktor pova ujete za nebezpe n takouto trasou sa neriad te Trasu navrhnut naviga n m syst mom pova ujte iba za odpor anie M e sa toti stat e naviga n syst m nezobraz spr vnu polohu vozidla nenavrhne najkrat iu trasu alebo v s nedovedie k po adovan mu ciel u V takomto pr pade sa spoliehajte na vlastn sudok a sk senosti a prihliadajte k aktu lnym podmienkam jazdy Nepou vajte naviga n syst m k navrhnutiu trasy k najbli ej n dzovej slu be Datab za toti neobsahuje kompletn zoznam poskytovatel
174. he antenna cable separately from the power supply lead speaker leads and the other cables of the vehicle gap wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Wire Connection Connecting to the CCD camera for vehicle Connect the CCD camera for vehicle to the CCD camera terminal on the main unit For detailed information refer to the instruction sheet or manual for the CCD camera Note A power supply box sold separately is required for connection of the main unit and the CCD camera The power supply box for the camera CAA185 cannot be used Please use the CAA188 instead Notes on wire connection When connecting the plugs and sleeves be sure to insert the plug until it locks securely After completing connections fasten the leads using lead clamps and tapes TYNNYIN NOILO3NNO9 HIM ONY NOILYTIVISNI Cut 5 mm Female gt as Sleeve o a If the male knob is in the shape shown at A cut the female sleeve about 5 mm Male Tape Ni Clamp Connecting the reverse gear or parking brake signal lead Connect each signal lead using the supplied electro taps From this unit 3 Electro tap 1 Place the lead from this unit at the stopper and fold it back in the direction of the arrow 2 Pass the vehicle signal lead through and fold it back in the direction of the arrow Vehicle and main unit signal lead 7 A A Stopper Power supply lead from this unit Vehicle and main unit signal lead P
175. he desired Language key you wish to set The factory default setting is English 3 Touch the Back key Setting up the audio language 1 Touch the Audio Language key 2 Touch the desired Language key you wish to set The factory default setting is English 3 Touch the Back key Setting up the subtitle language 1 Touch the Subtitle Language key 2 Touch the desired Language key you wish to set e To turn off the subtitle select the OFF key The factory default setting is English 3 Touch the Back key Setting up the password for setting up of the parental level 1 Touch the Password key 2 Touch the ten key 0 to 9 to input a 4 digit password Input the old password and touch the OK key The factory default setting is 0000 Input a new password and touch the OK key Input the same new password again and touch the OK key Note When a disc with view restrictions is inserted you will be prompted to input a password The disc will not be viewable until the correct password is entered MAX983HD 27 jenuew S I3umg DVD Video Operations Setting up the country code Set up the country number for setting up of the parental level 1 Touch the Locale key 2 Touch the ten key 0 to 9 to input a 4 digit country code see the following table e The factory default setting is 7166 U K 3 Touch the OK key Country
176. he next step imported by using SD cards 6 Touch the Memo key if you wish to enter Profile by the following procedure 1 ep ywnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Touch the Edit key of the Edit User Profile item The Edit User Profile screen is displayed Enter the desired text information using the keyboard displayed on the screen then touch the OK key to return to the User Profile screen e Once you enter the Memo information you cannot clear it User Settings 7 When editing User Profile completes touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Deleting the User Profile Note You cannot delete the current User Profile Delete it after switching to another User Profile 1 Touch the Delete key of the Delete User item The Delete User screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired User Profile key you wish to delete A confirmation screen is displayed 3 Touch the Yes key to delete the selected User Profile The selected User Profile is deleted then returns to the previous screen Switching the User Profile Note This operation is disabled while recording a CD or loading ejecting a disc 1 Touch the desired User Profile key you wish to switch to A confirmation screen is displayed 2 Touch the Yes key to switch to the selected User Profile The system will be restarted with the selected User Profile Setting Select on Opening Touch the ON or OFF
177. hing this key toggles the TV band between TV1 and TV2 Touch the desired Preset key on the Preset list pane to tune in the preset TV station Watching a video 1 2 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen then touch the Option key Touch the VTR key of the TV VTR item to change to the VTR mode e To return to the TV mode perform the same operation again Seek tuning 1 2 3 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen Touch the Band key to select the desired TV band TV1 or TV2 Touch a Seek key to automatically seek a station e Touching the A key to tune up the channel to the next available TV station and the v key to tune down Manual tuning There are 2 ways available Quick tuning and step tuning When you are in the step tuning mode the channel changes one step at a time In quick tuning mode you can quickly tune the desired frequency 1 2 3 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen Touch the Band key to select the desired band TV1 or TV2 Touch and hold the Band key for more than 1 second Manual appears and manual tuning is now available 4 Tune into a station Quick tuning Touch and hold a Seek key for more than 1 second to tune in a station Step tuning Touch a Seek key to manually tune in a station Recalling a preset station A total of 12 TV stations can be stored 6 TV1 and 6 TV2 There
178. hjeet VAROITUS T t navigointij rjestelm ei saa k ytt korvaamaan omaa harkintaasi Mitk n navigointij rjestelm n antamat reittiehdotukset eiv t koskaan saa ohittaa paikallisia liikennes nt j omaa harkintaasi ja tai turvallisen ajok ytt ytymisen tapoja J t noudattamatta navigointij rjestelm n ehdottamia reitityksi mik li ne johtaisivat vaarallisen tai lainvastaisen ajoliikkeen tekemiseen saattaisivat sinut vaaralliseen tilanteeseen tai toimimaan vastoin liikennes nt j tai opastaisivat sinut ei turvalliseksi pit m llesi alueelle Navigointij rjestelm n antamia ohjeita tulee pit ainoastaan ehdotuksena ehdotuksina Navigointij rjestelm k ytett ess saattaa synty tilanteita joissa navigointij rjestelm ilmoittaa ajoneuvosi sijainnin virheellisesti j tt ehdottamatta lyhyint reitti p m r si ja tai se ei anna opastusta haluamaasi m r np h n T llaisissa tilanteissa sinun tulee tukeutua omaan harkintaasi ajamisessasi ja sinun tulee huomioida kullakin hetkell vallitsevat ajo olosuhteet Al k yt navigointij rjestelm h t palveluiden reititt miseen J rjestelm n tietokanta ei sis ll t ydellist tiedostoa h t palveluiden suorittajista T llaisia h t palveluiden suorittajia ovat mm poliisi palolaitokset sairaalat ja ensiapuasemat Muista k ytt omaa harkintaasi ja mahdollisuutta kysy t llaisissa tilanteissa muilta ajo ohjeita
179. ic shock injury or accident may occur stpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Package Contents TYNNYIN NOILO3NNO9 HIM ONY NOILYTIVISNI 1 Main uniti aaa 1 7 Microphone extension lead 1 GPS antenna 1 Accessory bag No 1 1 Power supply lead 1 Accessory bag No 2 1 4 Vehicle signal lead 1 Owner s Manual this book 1 RCA pin lead 1 Navigation System Operation Manual 1 Microphone for voice control 1 Warranty card 1 Contents in the Accessory Bag No 1 1 Flat head screw M5 x 8 8 2 Sems hexagonal screw M5 x 8 8 3 Electro tap 2 4 Electro tap for speed sensor 1 5 Double sided tape for fastening o 4 5 6 7 antenna 1 A A 10 7 Double sided tape for microphone 1 Contents in the Accessory Bag No 2 8 8 Rubber cap for RCA pin lead 6 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 81 MAX983HD TANVIN NOILIINNOI JIM ANY NOILYTIVISNI Installing the Main Unit Cautions on Installation main unit before starting 2 This model features an operation panel that slides forward On some types of cars the operation panel may make contact with the dashboard or gea
180. icle position When the vehicle travels this system learns the distance and the direction advanced on the map from the travelling data and corrects the position accordingly distance coefficient learning function Therefore some initial travelling data is required for proper operation According to the travelling situation and condition of the GPS satellites the position of the vehicle position mark and the actual vehicle position may be different but this is not a malfunction Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Effective method to avoid the positioning error When you use the system for the first time dislocation may appear as the travelling data is few Though after travelling for a while on a road where the signal from the GPS satellites can be received well such as national roads principal main roads and principal minor roads the vehicle position mark will be displayed accurately on the map It is possible to train the system in a short time when applying the following method Travel about 15 to 20 km on a smooth road where there is no barrier in the sky like tall buildings or forests GPS signals can be received well at a constant speed of 25 km h or more try to avoid frequent acceleration and moderation MAX983HD 63 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2008 Clarion Co Ltd Nil lil Printed in Hungary Imprim en Hongrie Gedruckt in Ungarn QY 5003E B KILL be nan POB K ytt turvallisuuso
181. ika do wybranego przez niego celu W takich sytuacjach uzytkownik powinien opiera sie na wtasnej ocenie sytuacji biorac pod uwage warunki panujace na drodze Nie nalezy korzysta z systemu nawigacyjnego w przypadku koniecznosci dotarcia do instytucji oferujacych pomoc w nagtych wypadkach Baza danych nie zawiera petnej listy instytucji oferujacych pomoc w naglych wypadkach takich jak plac wki policji i strazy pozarnej szpitale i przychodnie Uzytkownik musi polega w tych sytuacjach na wtasnej ocenie sytuacji i mo liwo ci uzyskania wskaz wek Jako kierowca u ytkownik ponosi wy czn odpowiedzialno za swoje bezpiecze stwo na drodze W celu unikni cia wypadku lub wykroczenia na drodze u ytkownik powinien pami ta e rzeczywiste warunki na drodze i przepisy ruchu drogowego maj pierwsze stwo przed informacjami zawartymi w systemie nawigacyjnym Tym samym z powodu up ywu czasu zmieniaj cych si okoliczno ci oraz ze wzgl du na natur wykorzystanych r de oprogramowanie mo e zawiera niedok adne lub niepe ne informacje W trakcie jazdy nale y zawsze mie na uwadze rzeczywiste warunki na drodze i przepisy ruchu drogowego System nawigacyjny nie zapewnia ani w adnym zakresie nie stanowi informacji na temat przepis w dotycz cych ruchu drogowego w a ciwo ci pojazdu w tym wagi wysoko ci szeroko ci tadownosci i lub ogranicze pr dko ci warunk w na drodze w tym spadku nachylenia i l
182. in der Sie zum Zeitpunkt des Erwerbs der Datenbank Ihren Wohnsitz haben Haben Sie zu diesem Zeitpunkt Ihren Wohnsitz au erhalb der Europ ischen Union oder der Schweiz gilt das Recht jenes Landes innerhalb der Europ ischen Union oder der Schweiz in dem Sie die Datenbank erworben haben In allen brigen F llen oder in F llen in denen die Rechtsprechung in der Sie die Datenbank erworben haben nicht festgestellt werden kann gilt das niederl ndische Recht F r Rechtsstreitigkeiten im Zusammenhang mit diesem Vertrag gilt die Zust ndigkeit jenes Gerichts an dem Sie zum Zeitpunkt des Erwerbs der Datenbank Ihren Wohnsitz haben NAVTEQ ist dar ber hinaus berechtigt Klagen auch an dem Gericht Ihres damaligen Wohnsitzes einzureichen Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 571 CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR L UTILISATEUR FINAL VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE A L USAGE DE L UTILISATEUR FINAL AVANT D UTILISER LA BASE DE DONNEES NAVTEQ NOTE POUR L UTILISATEUR CECI EST UN CONTRAT DE LICENCE ETNON UN CONTRAT DE VENTE ENTRE VOUSETLA SOCIETE NAVTEQ B V POUR VOTRE COPIE DE LA BASE DE DONNEES NAVIGABLE DE NAVTEQ Y COMPRIS LE LOGICIEL QUI Y EST ASSOCIE LE SUPPORT ET LA DOCUMENTATION IMPRIMEE EXPLICATIVE PUBLIEE PAR NAVTEQ COLLECTIVEMENT DESIGNES PAR LA BASE DE DONNEES EN UTILISANT LA BASE DE DONNEES VOUS ACCEPTEZ LES TERMES ET CONDITIONS DE CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE POUR L UTILISATEUR FINAL CONTRAT
183. in memory There are 3 ways available to recall the preset station From the Tuner mode screen 1 Select the desired band by touching the Band key 2 Touch the desired Preset key on the Preset key pane to recall the preset station Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 21 MAX983HD Radio Operations Preset scan The Preset Scan receives the stations stored in the preset memory in order This function is useful when searching for the desired station in memory 1 Touch the PS key to start the Preset Scan The unit starts scanning each station for 7 seconds sequentially 2 When the desired station is tuned in touch the PS key again to continue receiving that station Auto store The Auto Store is a function for storing up to 6 stations that are automatically tuned in sequentially If 6 receivable stations cannot be received a previously stored station remains unoverwritten at the memory position 1 Select the desired band by touching the Band key 2 Touch and hold the AS key for more than 2 seconds A beep sounds and the stations with good reception are stored automatically to the preset channels Even if you select FM1 or FM2 the received stations are stored into the memory for AS Displaying radio text When the station receiving broadcasts text data you can display the data on the screen 1 Touch the Display key on the Tuner mode screen The received radio text is displayed on the screen
184. ing P 43 When the language setting is set to Swedish Portuguese or Denmark the voice command function is not available Voice Command Features Voice Command menu Pressing the VOICE button displays the following screen Voice Command en Find Destination Change Zoom Level Change Map view Current position Voice command please O AVIV key Displays the previous page or next page of the Voice Command list You can also operate by saying Previous page or Next page Voice Command list This is the list of the commands for voice operation The available commands at that time are displayed in yellow You cannot operate by touching this list 3 Cancel key Cancels the voice recognition and returns to the previous screen You can also achieve this by saying Cancel 7 key Suspends the voice input waiting mode and displays the available command list Touching this again returns to the voice input waiting mode Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Back key Returns to the previous screen When the voice command operation is suspended returns to the voice input waiting mode Voice input waiting time indication bar Indicates the time remaining of the voice input waiting mode Say the desired command during the blue bar is displayed The system returns to the previous screen when the blue bar runs out Note
185. ing zoals nationale wetgeving gebaseerd op de Europese Software Richtlijn 91 250 EEG en de Europese Databanken Richtlijn 96 9 EG zult u substanti le onderdelen van de inhoud van de Database niet opvragen of hergebruiken noch enig deel van de Database verveelvoudigen kopi ren veranderen aanpassen vertalen aan reverse engineering onderwerpen decompileren of disassembleren Indien u de in nationale wetgeving gebaseerd op de Software Richtlijn bedoelde informatie die vereist is om interoperabiliteit te bewerkstelligen wenst te verkrijgen dient u NAVTEQ redelijkerwijs in de gelegenheid te stellen u de bedoelde informatie te verschaffen op redelijke voorwaarden waaronder begrepen een redelijke vergoeding OVERDRACHT VAN HET GEBRUIKSRECHT Het is u niet toegestaan de Database over te dragen aan derden behoudens wanneer de Database is ge nstalleerd op het systeem waar het voor ontwikkeld is of wanneer u geen kopie van de Database behoudt na de overdracht en in ieder geval alleen indien degene aan wie wordt overgedragen alle bepalingen van deze OVEREENKOMST aanvaardt en dit schriftelijk aan NAVTEQ bevestigt CD sets mogen uitsluitend worden overgedragen of verkocht als complete set zoals geleverd door NAVTEQ en niet in delen daarvan BEPERKTE GARANTIE NAVTEQ garandeert met inachtneming van de waarschuwingen zoals hieronder uiteengezet dat de Database gedurende een periode van 12 maanden na verkrijging van uw exemplaar van de Database
186. ing menu 2 Touch the Service Option key to display the Service Option menu Demonstration Displays the demonstration of the route guidance Demo Touch the Select key then touch the desired demonstration course to play Backing up User Data You can back up the data currently stored in the navigation system to SD card Note This function saves the following data the data of the Stored Locations the route data the data registered in Favorite Frequent list the setting data of the Settings menu The recorded music data Playlist data and data imported using SD cards Skin Extra POI etc cannot be backed up Backup User Data When touching the Backup key a screen with a confirmation message appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen displayed Restoring User Data You can restore data backed up using SD card Note When you perform backup restore of data of two different navigation systems the stored data on the restored system will be lost Be sure to back up data of the system to restore to before performing the restore operation Restore User Data When touching the Restore key a screen with confirmation message appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen Resetting to the Factory Settings You can return the navigation system to the status after purchase Note When the system is reset to the factory settings all stored data is eras
187. ion Press to increase colour depth 7 Press to decrease colour depth Hue Adjusts the tone of colour red is emphasised or green is emphasised Press to increase green 7 Press to increase red Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the display Press to increase the contrast 7 Press to decrease the contrast Dimmer Adjusts the panel brightness Press to make image brighter 7 Press to make image dimmer Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 67 User Settings When you touch the User key from the Setting menu you can register User Profiles to personalise Favourite Frequent Recent Album list data Up to 4 User Profiles can be registered 4 When the name entry completes touch the OK key The new user profile is created and a confirmation screen is displayed 5 Touch the No key to return to the previous screen Touching the Yes key restarts the system with the new User Profile activated Edit the new User Profile by the following procedures e User Back ROBERT ALAN Add New Add New Edit User Profile Edit s Dele r Delete Select on Opening ON OFF Please select a menu item 0 00 6 Registering the User Profile Editing the User Profile 1 Touch the desired Add New key you wish You can edit the details of the registered User to register A confirmation screen is displayed 2 Touch the Yes key
188. ion using the Music Search function Touch the List Edit key to display the Playlist list screen From this screen you can perform the following operations gt Deleting Playlists Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Touch the Delete key The Playlist Delete screen is displayed Select the playlists you wish to delete by touching the Playlist keys Touching the Select All key selects all the listed Playlist keys Touch the OK key A confirmation screen is displayed Touch the Yes key to delete the selected playlist O Editing information of a Playlist 3 Touch the key displayed at the right of the desired Playlist key The information screen of the specified playlist is displayed 4 Touch the Playlist key edit the displayed playlist name by touching the characters on the screen then touch the OK key Edit by the same way as the Playlist name entry 5 Touch the Image key touch the desired Image key then touch the Back key You can assign your imported image data by touching the User key 6 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen O Editing track list of a Playlist 3 Touch the desired Playlist key you wish to edit tracks The track list screen of the specified playlist is displayed 4 Touch the Delete key to delete desired tracks e Delete tracks by the same way as deleting playlists 5 Touch the Add key to add tracks
189. ion screen touch the Yes key To edit the Stored Route 1 Touch the Stored Route key 2 Touch the name of the Stored Route you wish to edit 3 Touch the desired item then edit it Rename Changes the name of the Stored Route Replace Replaces the Stored Route with the current route Delete Deletes the Stored Route OK Terminates the editing then returns to the previous screen 4 Touch the OK key Stored Tracking By touching the Stored Tracking you can register edit the Stored Tracking or change settings for show hide of the Stored Tracking The operation procedures are the same as for the Tracking Display Settings of the Navigation settings Tracking Display Settings P 46 Avoid Area By touching the Avoid Area key you can set an Avoid Area The operation procedures are the same as for the Avoid Area Settings of the Navigation settings Avoid Area Settings P 45 Deleting registered data You can delete various data stored in the navigation system 1 Touch the Delete Stored Items key 2 Touch the item to delete Home Location All Stored Locations All Stored Routes Current Tracking All Stored Trackings All Avoid Areas All Previous Destinations Previous Starting Point All Favourite items All Frequent items 3 From the displayed confirmation screen touch the Yes key gQpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Importing Data
190. ion tillhandah llen eller r d tillhandah llet av NAVTEQ Er leverant r eller n gon annan person ger upphov till en garanti eller kar p n got s tt omfattningen av den ovan beskrivna begr nsade garantin Den begr nsade garantin enligt detta Avtal p verkar eller begr nsar inte n gon lagstadgad Sy nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD r ttighet som Ni kan ha enligt i lag f reskriven garanti mot dolda fel Om Ni inte anskaffade Databasen direkt fr n NAVTEQ kan Ni ha ytterligare lagstadgade r ttigheter gentemot den person fr n vilken Ni anskaffade Databasen ut ver de r ttigheter som Ni erh llit fran NAVTEA enligt denna best mmelse i enlighet med lagen i Er jurisdiktion NAVTEQs ovanst ende garanti p verkar inte s dana lagstadgade r ttigheter och Ni kan ut va s dana r ttigheter i till gg till garantierna i detta avtal ANSVARSBEGR NSNING Priset f r Databasen inkluderar inte n gon ers ttning f r vertagande av risken f r f ljdskador indirekta eller obegr nsade direkta skador vilka kan uppst i samband med Ert anv ndande av Databasen F ljaktligen skall NAVTEQ inte i n got fall vara ansvarigt f r n gra f ljdskador eller indirekta skador inkluderande utan begr nsning f rlust av inkomst data eller anv ndning som samkats Er eller tredje part h rr rande fr n Ert anv ndande av Databasen vare sig avseende inomobligatoriska eller utomobligatoriska anspr k eller baserade p garanti
191. irino nosilnostjo in ali hitrostnimi omejitvami podatkov o razmerah na cesti vklju no s podatki o naklonu strmini in ali cesti u informacij o ovirah na cesti vklju no z vi ino in irino tunelov ter mostov in ali drugimi obstoje imi voznimi razmerami in razmerami na cesti Uporabnik se mora vedno zanesti na lastno presojo pri tem pa naj upo teva trenutne razmere na cestah Uporabnik mora zni ati as gledanja na ekran med vo njo na minimum Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 565 Zasady bezpieczenstwa A Ostrzezenie System nawigacyjny nie powinien stanowi dla uzytkownika substytutu jego indywidualnej oceny sytuacji Jakiekolwiek wskaz wki dotyczace drogi generowane przez system nawigacyjny nie powinny nigdy zastepowa uzytkownikowi lokalnych przepis w drogowych indywidualnej oceny sytuacji i lub znajomosci zasad bezpiecznej jazdy Nie nalezy bra pod uwage wskaz wek systemu nawigacyjnego w przypadku gdy miatyby one zmusi uzytkownika do wykonania niebezpiecznego lub niezgodnego z prawem manewru postawi uzytkownika w niebezpiecznej sytuacji lub zaleci jazde na obszarze kt ry uzytkownik uwaza za niebezpieczny Porady generowane przez system nawigacyjny powinny by traktowane wytacznie jako sugestie Moga zdarzy sie sytuacje kiedy system nawigacyjny bedzie wskazywat niepoprawna pozycje pojazdu kiedy nie przedstawi propozycji najkr tszej trasy i lub nie pokieruje uzytkown
192. is key This key is displayed when the list is set to the nearby order 5 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the OK key 6 Touch the Start key By Nearby POI Select the category of the place then search for places around the current location 1 Touch the Nearby POI key 2 Touch your desired category When an additional category list is displayed touch a category again to select 3 From the displayed place list touch the place you wish to go to select it 4 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the OK key 5 Touch the Start key MAX983HD 23 Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu Going Home When your home address is registered you can start route guidance to your home by a simple operation Note When your home address is not registered register it by touching the Home Add New key When the list of searching methods appears register your home address by the desired method You can also register your home from the Stored Data of the Setting menu Home Location P 49 1 Touch the Home key 2 Touch the Start key The route to your home is automatically calculated and the route guidance is started By Previous Destination The destinations previously used are registered in the previous destination list up to 100 locations You can enter a destination by selecting it from this list When the previous destination list ex
193. is requested on a main road the end point of the suggested route may not exactly match the destination If a route calculation is requested on a main road the system may suggest a route starting from another main road In this case park the vehicle in a safe location and adjust the current location using Setting menu or continue driving until the vehicle icon appears on a main road If either of these methods are not successful request a route calculation again Ferry lines are stored in this system Take into consideration the travel time required and operational condition before deciding whether to use them or not The current location or the travelling direction may shift according to the travelling condition It is not a malfunction and will return to a normal display when keeping travelling for a while Though the vehicle position may shift in places other than the road such as in the parking lot etc it is not a malfunction It will return to a normal display when travelling on an actual road for a while In the current location display a representative name of the place which is nearest to the vehicle position in the map database is displayed it may be different from the actual place name HWownloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Notes on the Voice Guidance The voice guidance may not match the actual roads or regulations The cause of this can be that the actual roads and the data in the m
194. ita usted podr elegir entre obtener una devoluci n razonable del precio pagado por la Base de datos o rescindir este Contrato Lo anterior constituye la responsabilidad total de NAVTEQ y su nico recurso contra ella Salvo que haya sido dispuesto expl citamente en este art culo NAVTEQ no conceder ninguna Pagunloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD garantia ni har representaciones con respecto al uso de resultados o al uso de la Base de datos en t rminos de perfecci n exactitud fiabilidad u otros conceptos NAVTEQ no garantiza la perfecci n presente ni futura de la Base de datos Ninguna informaci n o recomendaci n oral o escrita que haya sido suministrada por NAVTEQ por su proveedor o por cualquier otra persona constituir garant a ni en ninguna otra forma contemplar una ampliaci n de la limitaci n de garant a anteriormente expuesta La limitaci n de garant a dispuesta en este Contrato no afecta o perjudica ning n derecho legal estatutario que usted pueda derivar de la garant a legal con respecto a defectos ocultos Si no ha adquirido la Base de datos directamente de NAVTEQ es posible que adem s de los derechos concedidos por NAVTEQ en virtud del presente contrato obtenga derechos legales estatutarios de la persona de quien ha obtenido su Base de datos de acuerdo con la legislaci n vigente en su jurisdicci n La anterior garant a de NAVTEQ no afectar dichos derechos legales y usted podr manten
195. ity or electric noises It is recommended that you back up your important data to a personal computer by using the SD card Skin You can import the Skin data stored in the SD card into the hard disk drive Touch the Import key of the Skin item then operate according to the displayed messages To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive touch the Delete key Image You can import the image data stored in the SD card into the hard disk drive Touch the Import key of the Image item then operate according to the displayed messages To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive touch the Delete key Note A special application is required for preparing image data used in this system You can download this application from the Clarion homepage http www clarion eu com Album Information You can import export the Album Information data into from the hard disk drive The Gracenote Media Database has the album track information data used in the Music Catcher mode Exporting the data to a PC you can obtain the latest information from the Gracenote Media Database Import Touch the Import key of the Album Information item then operate according to the displayed messages Export Touch the Export key of the Album Information item then operate according to the displayed messages Note A special application is required for obtaining the inform
196. ked si viszonyokat e Vezet s k zben lehet s g szerint a legr videbb ideig n zze a k perny t Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 567 NAVTEQ END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE NAVTEQ DATABASE NOTICE TO THE USER THIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT AND NOT AN AGREEMENT FOR SALE BETWEEN YOU AND NAVTEQ B V FOR YOUR COPY OF THE NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABASE INCLUDING ASSOCIATED COMPUTER SOFTWARE MEDIA AND EXPLANATORY PRINTED DOCUMENTATION PUBLISHED BY NAVTEQ JOINTLY THE DATABASE BY USING THE DATABASE YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN THE DATABASE ALONG WITH ALL OTHER ACCOMPANYING ITEMS TO YOUR SUP PLIER FOR A REFUND OWNERSHIP The Database and the copyrights and intellectual property or neighboring rights therein are owned by NAVTEQ or its licensors Ownership of the media on which the Database is contained is retained by NAVTEQ and or your supplier until after you have paid in full any amounts due to NAVTEQ and or your supplier pursuant to this Agreement or similar agreement s under which goods are provided to you NAVTEQ grants you a non exclusive license to use the Database for your personal use or if applicable for use in your business internal operations This license does not include th
197. keligheden som den var inden du modtog Databasen og den indeholder data og informationer fra offentlige myndigheder og andre kilder som kan indeholde fejl og udeladelser Som f lge deraf kan Databasen indeholde fejlagtige eller ufuldst ndige informationer p grund af tidens gang ndrede forhold og arten af de anvendte kilder Databasen indeholder ikke eller reflekterer informationer om bl a nabolagssikkerhed retsh ndh velse n dhj lp byggearbejde gade eller vejlukninger k ret js eller hastighedsrestriktioner gade vejh ldning eller niveau broh jde v gt eller andre begr nsninger vej eller trafikforhold s rlige begivenheder trafikpropper eller rejsetid G LDENDE LOV Lovene i den jurisdiktion hvori du bor p k bstidspunktet af database g lder for n rv rende aftale Hvis du p det tidspunkt opholder dig uden for Den Europ iske Union eller Schweiz er det loven i den jurisdiktion inden for Den Europ iske Union eller Schweiz hvor du k bte Databasen der g lder I alle andre tilf lde eller hvis jurisdiktionen p det sted du k bte Databasen ikke kan defineres er det lovene i Holland der g lder De kompetente retter p dit bop lssted p det tidspunkt du k bte Databasen har jurisdiktion over enhver tvist der m tte opst som f lge af eller vedr rende n rv rende aftale uden skade for NAVTEQ s ret til at rejse krav p dit nuv rende bop lssted Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 58
198. l alla villkor och best mmelser i detta Avtal och skriftligen bekr ftar detta till NAVTEQ Set med flera skivor f r endast verf ras eller s ljas som ett komplett set s som det levereras av NAVTEQ och inte som delar av ett set BEGR NSAD GARANTI NAVTEQ garanterar med f rbeh ll f r Varningarna nedan f r en tidsperiod p 12 m nader efter anskaffandet av Ert exemplar av Databasen att den fungerar v sentligen i enlighet med NAVTEQs exakthets och fullst ndighetsnorm i dess lydelse vid det datum d Ni anskaffade Databasen dessa normer kan ni p beg ran f av NAVTEQ Om Databasen inte fungerar i enlighet med denna begr nsade garanti kommer NAVTEQ att vidta sk liga f rs k att reparera eller byta ut Ert icke verensst mmande exemplar av Databasen Om dessa f rs k inte leder till att Databasen fungerar i enlighet med garantierna uppst llda i detta avtal kan Ni v lja att antingen erh lla sk lig terbetalning av den k peskilling Ni betalade f r Databasen eller att h va detta Avtal Detta r NAVTEOs hela ansvarsskyldighet och Er enda r tt till gottg relse fr n NAVTEQ F rutom s som uttryckligen r f reskrivet i detta avsnitt garanterar NAVTEQ inte eller g r n gon utf stelse betr ffande anv ndandet av resultaten fr n nyttjandet av Databasen vad avser riktighet exakthet tillf rlitlighet eller annorledes NAVTEQ garanterar inte att Databasen r eller kommer att vara felfri Ingen muntlig eller skriftlig informat
199. l warranty against hidden defects If you did not acquire the Database from NAVTEQ directly you may have statutory rights against the person from whom you have acquired the Database in addition to the rights granted by NAVTEQ hereunder according to the law of your jurisdiction The above warranty of NAVTEQ shall not affect such statutory rights and you may assert such rights in addition to the warranty rights granted herein LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The price of the Database does not include any consideration for assumption of risk of consequential indirect or unlimited direct damages which may arise in connection with your use of the Database Accordingly in no event shall NAVTEQ be liable for any consequential or indirect damages including without limitation loss of revenue data or use incurred by you or any third party arising out of your use of the Database whether in an action in contract or tort or based on a warranty even if NAVTEQ has been advised of the possibility of such damages In any event NAVTEQ s liability for direct damages is limited to the price of your copy of the Database THE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT DO NOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS WHERE YOU HAVE ACQUIRED THE DATABASE OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS WARNINGS The Database may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time changing circumstances sources used and the
200. layed e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen 2 Touch the desired Record key you wish to dial The confirming message will appear 3 Touch the Yes key to call the specified number The Telephone Interrupt screen is displayed and calling starts e When the call is finished touch the E key to hang up gpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD CCD Camera Operations Ifthe optional CCD rear camera is installed in this system the rear view image is displayed on the screen when the gear lever is put in the reverse gear position In addition this system can display guidelines on the camera image which helps you to perceive the size of the vehicle Please check surroundings for safety Note The CCD camera image is not displayed on the rear monitor Displaying the Guidelines on the camera image 1 Touch the screen when the rear view image is displayed The Guide line key is displayed e The Guide line key will disappear 3 seconds later 2 Touch the Guide line key A confirmation screen is displayed 3 Touch the OK key The guidelines are displayed on the screen image Touching the Guide line key turns the guidelines display on off Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Adjusting the guidelines position You can adjust the position of the guidelines so that the size of the vehicle is represented 1 Display
201. ler p ditt hjemsted p det tidspunkt du kj pte Databasen skal ha domsmakt i eventuelle tvister som m tte oppst p grunn av eller i forbindelse med denne avtalen uten prejudise for NAVTEOs rett til reise krav mot deg p ditt den gang gjeldende hjemsted Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 587 SMLOUVA O POSKYTNUTI LICENCE KONCOVEMU UZIVATELI PROSIME PRECTETE SI PECLIVE TUTO SMLOUVU O LICENCI KONCOVEHO UZIVATELE RRED TIM NEZ POUZIJETE DATABAZI NAVTEQ OZN MENI UZIVATELI TOTO JE SMLOUVA O LICENCI A NIKOLI SMLOUVA O PRODEJI MEZI V MI A SPOLEGNOSTI NAVTEQ B V NA VA I KOPII DATAB ZE NAVIGOVATELNYCH MAP NAVTEQ V ETN SOUVISEJICIHO PROGRAMOVEHO VYBAVEN NOSICU A VYSVETLUJICI TISTENE DOKUMENTACE PUBLIKOVAN SPOLE NOST NAVTEQ SOUHRNN DATAB ZE POU IT M DATAB ZE P IJ M TE A SOUHLAS TE SE V EMI PODM NKAMI T TO SMLOUVY O LICENCI KONCOV HO U IVATELE D LE SMLOUVA A SOUHLAS TE S NIMI NESOUHLAS TE LI S PODM NKAMI T TO SMLOUVY NEPRODLEN VRA TE DATAB ZI SPOLU SE V EMI DAL MI DOPROVODN MI POLO KAMI SV MU DODAVATELI K REFUNDACI VLASTNICTV Datab ze a vlastnick pr va a du evn vlastnictv nebo hrani c pr va v nich jsou ve vlastnictv spole nosti NAVTEO nebo osob kter j poskytuj licence Vlastnictv nosi na nich je obsa ena Datab ze si ponech v NAVTEQ a nebo V dodavatel dokud pln neuhradite spole nosti NAVTEQ a nebo Va emu
202. lic vel a legisla o em vigor nos Pa ses Baixos Aquando da aquisi o da Base de Dados ser o as inst ncias competentes no seu local de resid ncia que dever o exercer a sua jurisdi o relativamente a qualquer lit gio decorrente do presente Acordo ou com este relacionado sem preju zo do direito da NAVTEQ a intentar uma ac o judicial naquele que seja ent o o seu local de resid ncia Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 583 LICENSAVTAL F R SLUTANV NDARE L S DETTA LICENSAVTAL F R SLUTANV NDARE NOGGRANT INNAN NI ANVANDER NAVTEQ DATABAS MEDDELANDE TILL ANV NDARE en DETTA R ETT LICENSAVTAL OCH INTE ETT AVTAL F R F RS LJNING MELLAN ER OCH NAVTEQ B V F R ERT EXEMPLAR AV NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAP DATABAS INKLUDERANDE TILLH RANDE PROGRAMVARA MEDIA OCH TRYCKT MANUAL UTGIVEN AV NAVTEQ GEMENSAMT BEN MNDA DATABASEN GENOM ATT ANV NDA DATABASEN ACCEPTERAR NI OCH SAMTYCKER TILL ALLA VILLKOR OCH BEST MMELSER DETTA LICENSAVTAL F R SLUTANVANDARE AVTAL OM NI INTE SAMTYCKER TILL VILLKOREN I DETTAAVTAL RETURNERA OMG ENDE DATABASEN TILLSAMMANS MED ALLA ANDRA TF LJANDE ARTIKLAR TILL ER LEVERANT R F R TERBETALNING GANDER TT Databasen och upphovsr tter immateriell egendom eller n rliggande r ttigheter d ri gs av NAVTEQ eller dess licensgivare Agander tten till de media som inneh ller Databasen kvarligger hos NAVTEQ och eller Er leverant r till dess att Ni erlagt samtliga belo
203. ll not operate or may operate improperly with unsupported versions For the information on the compatible models to the iPod video mode operations see the Clarion homepage http www clarion com Some functions may not operate properly depending to the software version of the iPod Use the iPod updated with latest software downloaded from the Apple s website When you connect the iPod which a great number of tracks are stored it may take a long time to establish jenuew saumo the connection with the iPod or to control the iPod features Notes regarding use of Apple iPod After the iPod has been connected to this unit the iPod s buttons are disabled for operation When the iPod mode has been selected with 2Zone function OFF the following screen is output to the rear monitor When audio data is played black screen When video data is played video image The remote control unit cannot be used to perform scan repeat or random play This unit can display the Podcast titles 1 Artist names Album titles Song titles Genre names Playlist titles Composer names and Audiobooks titles 1 registered on the iPod When no data is present the title display will remain blank 1 Whether these functions are available or not depends on the iPod version The iPod is used with the equalizer function turned OFF Do not connect an iPod to this unit with a headset connected to the iPod Selecting the iPod mode
204. lle fall er NAVTEQs erstatningsansvar begrenset til prisen p din kopi av Databasen DEN BEGRENSEDE GARANTIEN OG ANSVARSFRASKRIVELSEN UTTRYKT I DENNE AVTALEN P VIRKER IKKE OG ER UTEN PREJUDISE FOR DINE LOVFESTEDE RETTIGHETER HVIS DU HAR KJ PT DATABASEN P EN ANNEN MATE ENN VED EN FORRETNINGSTRANSAKSJON ADVARSLER Databases gjenspeiler virkeligheten slik den var f r du mottok Databasen og omfatter data og informasjon fra statlige og andre kilder som kan inneholde feil og utelatelser F lgelig kan Databasen inneholde uriktig eller ufullstendig informasjon p grunn av tidsforl p endrede omstendigheter og de anvendte kildenes art Databasen inkluderer eller gir ikke informasjon om blant annet sikkerhet i n rmilj et lovh ndheving n dhjelp konstruksjonsarbeider stengte veier og gater kj ret y eller fartsbegrensninger veibanens fall eller stigning broh yde vekt eller andre begrensninger vei eller trafikkforhold spesielle hendelser trafikkorker eller reisetid GJELDENDE LOV Denne avtalen skal rette seg etter lovene i rettskretsen der du bor p den datoen Databasen blir kj pt Skulle du p dette tidspunkt bo utenfor den Europeiske Union eller Sveits er det loven i den rettskretsen innenfor den Europeiske Union eller Sveits hvor du kj pte Databasen som kommer til anvendelse I alle andre tilfeller eller hvis den rettskrets hvor du kj pte Databasen ikke kan defineres skal loven i Nederland anvendes De kompetente domsto
205. m sound when the vehicle gets near a Safety Camera location Camera Location Touch the List key to display the list of the Safety Camera locations Touching an item of the list displays the icon at the location of the Safety Camera on the right map Note These settings are enabled when the Safety Camera data is stored in the hard disk Safety Camera P 71 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 73 jenuew s 1aumg Voice Command Operations This system has built in voice recognition function You can perform fundamental operations by saying the corresponding voice commands For details of the operations see the Navigation Manual List of the Voice commands AV features The following table lists the fundamental command examples available to control the AV features Note You can omit the term enclosed by Touching the key displays the voice commands usable at that operating condition You can refer to them Common voice commands available anytime during voice input These are the commonly usable commands in any condition during the voice input operation Operation Command Terminates the voice operation and displays the current location map screen Map Current Position Display Show Map Go to Map Show me Where am I Current Location Cancels the immediately precedent voice operation and returns to the previous voic
206. mation concerning the navigation function Map Guidance Settings Guidance Voice Settings You can change settings concerning the screen You can change settings concerning the voice route guidance guidance 1 Touch the Map Guidance Settings key 1 Touch the Guidance Voice Settings key The Guidance Settings menu screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired menu item to set Route Guidance Turns ON OFF the route guidance When you touch the OFF key the route guidance is not available 3D Junction View Shows hides the 3D Junction guidance screen Small Turn Arrow on Map Shows hides the Small Turn Arrow displayed at the upper left of the Map screen Interrupt AV You can set the interrupt of the route guidance screen while displaying the audio screen OFF The audio screen is not interrupted Mi Displays the small turn arrow on the information pane You can hide the arrow by touching it E The Route Guidance screen interrupts the audio screen and returns to the main audio screen when the interrupt finishes Set Average Speeds When you set Auto to OFF you can set the average speed of the vehicle for each road type The time required to the destination will be calculated in consideration of the speed set e Auto When you touch the ON key the time required is automatically calculated To set the average speeds manually touch the OFF key
207. me mobile phones may not be able to transfer the Phone Book data Only the Phone Book items with at least one telephone number registered in the captured Phone Book data are displayed on the Phone Book screen 1 Touch the Phone Book key to display the Phone Book screen Im Phone Book Anderson Bin David Smith Thomas Please select an item 2 Touch the desired Name key you wish to dial Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list e When you touch the alphabet key at the right of the screen the list scrolls to the item which starts with the specified character 3 Touch the desired Number key you wish to dial The confirming message will appear 4 Touch the Yes key to call the specified number The Telephone Interrupt screen is displayed and calling starts e When the call is finished touch the key to hang up Using Dialled Received Missed Calls records The system will capture the Dialled Received Missed calls record data in the selected mobile phone You can confirm it and use it to make a call from this unit Note Some mobile phones may not be able to transfer the record data Depending on the mobile phone the record data may not be updated correctly when a call is made in the Private mode 1 Touch the Dialled Numbers Received Calls or Missed Calls key according to the type of record list you wish to display The corresponding record list screen is disp
208. monstration ofthe navigation system backup or restore of stored data and resetting to the factory settings 1 Touch the gt Next key from the Setting menu 2 Touch the Service Option key to display the Service Option menu Demonstration Displays the demonstration of the route guidance Demo Touch the Select key then touch the desired demonstration course to play Backing up User Data You can back up the data currently stored in this system to an SD card Note This function saves the following data the data of the Stored Locations the route data the data registered in Favourite Frequent list the setting data of the Settings menu The recorded music data Playlist data and data imported using SD cards Skin Image Album Information Extra POI cannot be backed up Backup User Data When touching the Backup key a screen with a confirmation message appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen Restoring User Data You can restore data backed up by using an SD card Note When you perform backup restore of data of two different systems the stored data on the restored system will be lost Be sure to back up data of this system to restore to before performing the restore operation Restore User Data When touching the Restore key a screen with confirmation message appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen Resetting to the Factory Se
209. n Touching the screen during the playback displays the following DVD Video mode screen Title No EA ovo video Top Menu Menu Chapter r lt lt gt gt Option 0 00 Information pane Chapter No If you do not operate the menu for 5 seconds the DVD Video mode screen will automatically be hidden and it returns to the playback screen To close the DVD Video mode screen within 5 seconds touch the Close key AV Shortcut menu on the Map screen Title DI Chapter 001 00 01 06 0 00 Changing the DVD System Settings Note Ifthe Setup operation is performed in the middle of DVD video play the disc will restart from the beginning Selecting the DVD Setup menu 1 Touch the screen to display the DVD Video mode screen 2 Touch the Option key to display the Option menu 3 Touch the Setup key to display the DVD Setup menu 58 DVD Setup TV Display Angle Menu Language Audio Language Subtitle Language Please select a menu item Touch the Y key to display the next menu Touch the A key to return to the previous menu 38 DVD Setup Audio Language Subtitle Language Password Locale Parental Level Please select a menu item 4 Perform setting for the desired setting items See the following sections for detail In the following sections only the details of settings are described the procedures to select items are skipped 5 Touch the Back key
210. n Indicates the direction to the destination from the current location 5 Guidance point Indicates the guidance point 6 Next intersecting Road name and distance The distance to the next guidance intersection and the name of the next intersecting road will be displayed when you get near to approx 600 m or 600 yd 2 km or 1 4 mile for a motorway to the intersection MAX983HD 1 3 Map Screen Features Map symbols This navigation system indicates information such as roads and facilities using symbols and colours Colour of the roads Motorways ES Yellow with red border Main roads muu Red Minor roads E Yellow Map symbols examples The following map symbols are displayed on the map Municipal Office Rental Car Company University or College Military Base Petrol Station Hotel E F Airport fe Historical Site m Li Restaurant Science Museum Main Station Shopping Centre m Art Museum da Station un Information i Supermarket de Ferry Terminal MES Park amp Ride lt gt Golf Course G Car Park Le Recreation Ground dh Marina Pl Parking Lot di Sports Complex Marina gt Parking Garage MA Library A Other Facilities Landmark icons Landmark icons are displayed on the Intersection map screen etc Whether they are displayed or not can be set Landmark Icon display P 45 4 Hospital ah Petrol Station G Car Park al Hotel q Restaurant ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com M
211. n siin tuomioistuimessa joka on toimivaltainen k ytt j n kotipaikassa tietokannan hankintahetkell t m n rajoittamatta NAVTEOin oikeutta nostaa kanne k ytt j n kulloisenkin kotipaikan tuomioistuimessa Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 591 This system contains software that is licensed to Manufacturer by an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license agreement Any removal reproduction reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and may subject you to legal action Microsoft Windows and the Windows Logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Copyright 2006 Arex Co Ltd Japan All rights reserved This product is loaded with MatrixEngine of NETDIMENSION CORPORATION for the 3D contents drive 2006 NETDIMENSION CORPORATION ASFiNAG ome Austria Belgium Croatia France Germany Great Britain Hungary Italy Norway Poland Portugal Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Der Location und Event Code wurde von der ASFINAG und dem BMVIT zur Verf gung gestellt Traffic Information is provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the Minist rie de l Equipement et des Transports EuroGeographics source G oroute IGN France amp BD Carto IGN France Die Grundla
212. neholde un yaktig eller ufullstendig informasjon som f lge av tidens l p endrede forhold eller som f lge av den aktuelle kildens art Vennligst iaktta de r dende trafikkforhold og trafikkregler ved all kj ring Navigasjonssystemet tar verken hensyn til eller gj r rede for p noen som helst m te informasjon vedr rende lover og trafikkregler fartsrestriksjoner veiforhold inklusive helling dosering og eller veidekke informasjon om veihinder inklusiv bro og tunnelh yder og bredder og eller andre r dende kj re og eller veiforhold Baser Dem derfor alltid p Deres egen vurdering og skj nn under hensyn til r dende kj reforhold Bruk minst mulig tid til se p skjermen mens De kj rer Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 561 Bezpe nostni opatreni A Varov n Tento naviga n syst m by nem l nahrazovat v vlastn sudek Bez ohledu na to jakou trasu tento naviga n syst m navrhne mus te v dy dodr ovat dopravn p edpisy dit se vlastn m sudkem a dodr ovat z sady bezpe n ho zen vozidla V p pad e naviga n syst m navrhne trasu na kter byste museli prov st riskantn man vr nebo man vr v rozporu s dopravn mi p edpisy dostali se do nebezpe n situace nebo by v s trasa zavedla do oblasti kterou pova ujete za nebezpe nou takovou trasou se ne id te e Trasu navr enou naviga n m syst mem pova ujte pouze za doporu en M e
213. nen oder Ratschl ge seitens NAVTEQ Ihrem H ndler oder anderen Personen in keinem Fall erg nzt oder erweitert Soweit Sie gesetzliche Gew hrleistungsrechte f r versteckte Fehler haben werden diese durch die in diesem Vertrag festgelegte beschr nkte Gew hrleistung nicht ber hrt Falls Sie die Datenbank nicht direkt von NAVTEQ erworben haben haben Sie m glicherweise zus tzlich zu den von NAVTEQ laut dem vorliegenden Vertrag gew hrten Rechten nach nationaler Rechtsprechung Ihres Landes weitere gesetzliche Gew hrleistungsrechte gegen ber der Person von der Sie die Datenbank erworben haben Die vorstehende Gew hrleistung von NAVTEQ l sst derartige gesetzliche Gew hrleistungsrechte unber hrt und Sie sind berechtigt derartige Rechte zus tzlich zu den nach diesem Vertrag gew hrten Gew hrleistungsrechten geltend zu machen HAFTUNGSBESCHR NKUNG N Der Preis f r die Datenbank umfasst nicht die bernahme des Risikos von Folgesch den mittelbaren Sch den oder unbegrenzten unmittelbaren Sch den die in Zusammenhang mit Ihrer Verwendung der Datenbank entstehen k nnen NAVTEQ haftet daher in keinem Fall f r Folgesch den oder mittelbare Sch den einschlie lich aber nicht beschr nkt auf Gewinnverlust Datenverlust oder Nutzungsausfall die durch Sie oder Dritte in Folge der Verwendung der Datenbank entstehen k nnen selbst wenn NAVTEQ auf die M glichkeit solcher Sch den hingewiesen worden ist Die vorstehende Haftungsbeschr nkun
214. ng brake is engaged Disc cannot play with the display PARENTAL CONTROL Please change the parental access level to playback the current disc shown Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals The view is limited Release the view limitation or change the parental level Setting up the parental level P 29 75 MAX983HD jenuew S I3umg Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy TV Tuner When the optional TV tuner is conne cted The image is not displayed The parking brake is not engaged Check that the parking brake is engaged The display is dark The brightness control is too low Adjust the brightness properly The operating condition is not good The temperature inside the vehicle may be 0 C or lower Set to an appropriate temperature 25 C or so and check it again The headlight of the vehicle is lit The display is made dark at night to prevent the glare When the headlight of the vehicle is lit in the daytime the display gets dark The colour of the display is light or a shade of colour is not good The colour is not adjusted adequately Check that Colour and Hue are adjusted properly When the VTR is connected the image is disturbed Improper NTSC PAL setting Set the VTR to output the PAL signals When the TV tuner is connected the image gets unclear Bad receiving condition A radio wave ma
215. nia 11 0 Slovakia 13 0 Slovenia 24 0 NAVTEQ as of December 2007 ON BOARD m Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 593 Clarion Owner s manual Audio Visual General amp Installation Mode d emploi Audio vid o fonctionnement g n ral et installation Benutzerhandbuch Lyd visuel generelt og installation Manuale dell utente Audio video generali e installazione Gebruikershandleiding Audio visueel algemeen en installatie Gu a de usuario Imagen sonido general e instalaci n garhandbok Ljud Sikt Allm nt amp Installation Manual do utilizador udio Visual Geral e Instalac o Brugervejledning Audio Video Allgemein und Installation MAX983HD HDD NAVIGATION SYSTEM SYSTEME DE NAVIGATION HDD HDD NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM SISTEMA DI NAVIGAZIONE HDD HDD NAVIGATIESYSTEEM SISTEMA DE NAVEGACI N HDD NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM MED H RDDISK SISTEMA DE NAVEGAC O COM HDD UNIDADE DE DISCO R GIDO HDD NAVIGATIONSSYSTEM Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Safety Precautions When using this system follow the precautions listed below After reading this manual be sure to keep it in a handy place such as the glove box of your car A WARNING For your safety the driver should not watch the DVD video TV VTR or operate the controls while driving Please note that watching and operating the DVD video TV VTR while driving are prohi
216. not be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Showing the DVD video mode screen touch the Option key 2 Touch the Audio key during playback Each time you touch the key you can switch among audio languages Depending on the disc up to 8 audios may be recorded For details see the mark of the disc 2 Indicates that 2 audios have been recorded When the power is turned on and the disc is changed to a new one the language set as the factory default is selected If that language has not been recorded the language is specified on the disc MAX983HD 31 jenuew s 1aumg DVD Video Operations e Depending on the disc switching may be completely impossible or impossible on some scenes lt may take time to switch among audios 3 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Switching subtitles On DVD discs in which two or more subtitle languages have been recorded you can switch among the subtitle languages during playback This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Showing the DVD video mode screen touch the Option key 2 Touch the Subtitle key during playback Each time you touch the key you can switch among subtitles e Depending on the disc up to 32 kinds of subtitles may be recorded For details see the mark of the disc 2 Indicates that 2 kinds of subtitles have been recorded e Depending on the disc switching may be
217. nstall it in a place where it may interfere with the operation of the airbag Do not install this unit in the following locations A location interfering with the driver s visual range or operation A location where the gear lever or brake pedal operation is hindered A location where passengers are at risk An unstable location or where the system may fall A CAUTION Do not install the system in the locations described below This may cause a fire accident or electrical shock A location exposed to rain or dust e A location interfering with the driver s visual range or operation of the vehicle An unstable location or where the system may fall Do not install this unit in a place exposed to direct sunlight or heat or a place where the vent holes or heat radiation holes are covered When you install the antenna mount it in a place where the elements of the antenna do not protrude beyond the edge of the front back left and right of the vehicle If it comes in contact with pedestrians it may cause an accident Installation notes WARNING Please note the position of pipes tanks and electrical wirings before installing the unit into the vehicle Failure in avoiding these may cause a fire or malfunction Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals A CAUTION e Use only the supplied parts If unspecified parts are used they may cause damage Any hole
218. nt Search key Area Search Displays the City name list that corresponds to the input postal code Search a place by the same way of searching by address 2 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the OK key If a different place from where you wish to go to is displayed touch the Back key to return to the previous screen then perform the procedure of When the Country is set to an other than the United Kingdom and the Netherlands listed below 3 Touch the Start key O When the Country is set to an other than the United Kingdom and the Netherlands 1 Touch the Area Search key 2 Touch the desired City name to select The Address input screen is displayed 3 If required enter the Street name and House No then touch the OK key 4 Touch the Start key 32pwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Searching Your Destination from the Destination Menu By Motorway Entrance Exit You can search an entrance or exit of a motorway to set as the destination 1 Touch the gt gt Next key 2 Touch the M way Entrance Exit key 3 Touch the Country key then touch the country name if necessary 4 Touch the Motorway key 5 Enter the name of the motorway then touch the OK key 6 From the displayed Motorway list touch the desired motorway to select 7 Select the Entrance or Exit key 8 From the displayed Entrance list or Exit list touch the place you wi
219. nti mod skjulte mangler Hvis du ikke k bte Databasen direkte fra NAVTEQ har du m ske lovf stede rettigheder mod den person fra hvilken du k bte Databasen udover de herunder af NAVTEQ afgivne rettigheder i overensstemmelse med bestemmelserne i din jurisdiktion NAVTEQ s ovenst ende garanti har ingen indflydelse p s danne lovf stede rettigheder og s danne rettigheder kan du g re g ldende foruden de heri givne garantirettigheder BEGR NSNING AF ANSVAR Databasens pris indbefatter ikke nogen betaling for accept af risiko for sekund re indirekte eller ubegr nsede indirekte skader der m tte opst i forbindelse med din brug af Databasen overensstemmelse hermed p tager NAVTEQ sig intet ansvar for sekund re eller indirekte skader herunder ogs og uden begr nsning tab af indt gt data eller brug du eller nogen tredjemand m tte lide som f lge af din brug af Databasen enten det er s gsm l inden for kontrakt eller uden for kontrakt baseret p en garanti selv om NAVTEQ er blevet oplyst om muligheden for s danne erstatningskrav Under alle omst ndigheder er NAVTEQ s ansvar for direkte skader begr nset til k bsprisen for din kopi af Databasen DEN BEGR NSEDE GARANTI OG DET BEGR NSEDE ANSVAR ANF RT I N RV RENDE SLUTBRUGERLICENSAFTALE HAR INGEN INDFLYDELSE P ELLER ER TIL SKADE FOR DINE LOVF STEDE RETTIGHEDER HVIS DU HAR K BT DATABASEN P ANDEN VIS END ET FORRETNINGSFORL B ADVARSLER Databasen reflekterer vir
220. nu Navi Shortcut menu P 8 You can customise the 5 categories of the Quick POI In the factory settings the following categories are registered Item 1 PETROL STAION Item 2 RESTAURANT Item 3 CAR PARK Item 4 HOTEL Item 5 HOSPITAL 1 Touch the Quick POI Settings key The Item list of Quick POI is displayed 2 Touch the desired Item of Quick POI you wish to change 3 Touch the desired main category of Quick POI 4 Touch the desired sub category of the Quick POI The system returns to the Item list of Quick POI Afgwaloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Navigation Settings Map Scrolling Information You can set the information displayed on the scrolled map screen 1 Touch the Map Scrolling Information key The Map Scrolling Information menu screen is displayed 2 Touch the ON or OFF key of each item Address Book Icons Shows hides detail information display for icons of locations registered in the Address Book while scrolling TMC Traffic Icons Shows hides detail information display for icons of TMC traffic information while scrolling Destination Waypoint Icons Shows hides detail information display for destination and waypoints icons while scrolling Latitude Longitude Info Shows hides the latitude longitude information displayed at the bottom right of the screen Adjusting Current Location
221. nyttes dersom denne er i strid med eller tilsidesetter lokale trafikkreguleringer deres egne vurderinger eller skjonn og eller gjeldende regler og praksis for sikker kjoring Se bort fra ruteanbefalinger fra navigasjonssystemet hvis slike anbefalinger enten skulle medf re at De m tte utfore en farlig eller ulovlig manover sette Dem eller noen i en farlig situasjon eller dirigere Dem inn i et omr de De vurderer som usikkert Anbefalinger som navigasjonssystemet gir m bare anses som forslag Det kan oppst situasjoner hvor navigasjonssystemet feil oppgir kjoretoyets lokasjon mislykkes med foresl det korteste veivalget og eller mislykkes i dirigere Dem til Deres nskede m l I slike situasjoner m De derfor basere Dem p Deres egne vurderinger under hensyn til r dende kjoreforhold Aldri bruk navigasjonssystemet til dirigere Dem til nodhjelp og lignende tjenester Databasen inneholder ikke en fullstendig oversikt over politistasjoner brannstasjoner sykehus klinikker eller lignende steder hvor nodhjelp finnes Vennligst forhold Dem til Deres egne vurderinger og Deres evne til sp rre om veien ved behov for n dhjelp og lignende situasjoner Som f rer av kjoretoy er De alene ansvarlig for Deres sikkerhet i trafikken For unng en trafikkulykke eller en overtredelse av trafikkreglene husk at de r dende veiforholdene og trafikkreglene gjelder foran informasjon som finnes i navigasjonssystemet Programvaren kan in
222. o Map Colour 4 keys you wish to set Vehicle Icon Selects the type of the vehicle mark from 2 types Vehicle Icon Touch the desired mark you wish to use Route Colour Selects the colour of the suggested route displayed on the Map screen Route Colour Touch the desired colour you wish to set Landmark Icon display Switches ON and OFF Landmark icon display for each type 1 Touch the Landmark Icons key The list of the Landmarks is displayed 2 Touch the ON or OFF key of the desired icon type you wish to change the setting for The types of Landmarks that can be set are the following five types The factory settings are all OFF 3 Landmark icons P 14 Petrol Station Restaurant Car Park Hotel Hospital Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Avoid Area Settings You can register areas you do not want to pass or areas that often get congested as an Avoid Area When you register the Avoid Areas you can set the system to calculate routes avoiding the registered areas Setting the conditions of the route calculation P 34 Up to 10 Avoid Areas can be registered You can edit the registered Avoid Areas Note You can also register edit them from the Stored Data of the Setting menu Avoid Area P 50 To register an Avoid Area 1 Touch the Avoid Area Settings key The list screen of Avoid Areas is displayed 2 Touch the None Add N
223. o ne ili nepotpune informacije uslijed proteka vremena promijenjenih okolnosti i zbog prirode kori tenih izvora Molimo motrite stvarne prometne okolnosti i regulaciju za itavo vrijeme dok vozite Navigacijski sustav ne daje niti na bilo koji na in uzima u obzir prometne i cestovne propise specifikacije vozila uklju uju i masu visinu irinu nosivost i ili ograni enja brzine uvjete na cestama uklju uju i strminu uspon i ili stanje podloge kolinka podatke o preprekama uklju uju i visinu i irinu mosta ili tunela i ili druge zna ajne uvjete vo nje i ili uvjete na cesti Uvijek se oslanjajte na vlastitu voza ku procjenu uzimaju i u obzir trenutne uvjete vo nje Vrijeme u kojem promatrate ekran za vrijeme vo nje svedite na najmanje mogu e Ap nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Varnostne informacije Opozorilo Ta navigacijski sistem ne nadome a presoje uporabnika Katerokoli usmeritveno priporo ilo vsebovano v tem navigacijskem sistemu ne more nikoli imeti prednosti pred lokalnimi prometnimi predpisi pred osebno presojo uporabnika in ali pred pravili varne vo nje V primeru da bi usmeritvena priporo ila vsebovana v tem navigacijskem sistemu od uporabnika zahtevale tvegano ali nezakonito ravnanje ali bi ga pripeljala v tvegano situacijo ali na obmo je za katerega meni da je nevarno se usmeritvenih priporo il vsebovanih v tem navigacijskem sistemu ne sme uporablja
224. of the rear monitor 1 Turn on the power of the rear monitor 2 Switch the Source modes of the rear monitor so that the video image output from the main unit is displayed 3 Play your desired visual source on the main unit e Control the visual source from the main unit or using the optional remote control unit Remote Control Operations P 61 erpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Remote Control Operations You can use the optional remote control unit to control the AV features of this unit Name of the Buttons Signal transmitter CAR Operating range 30 in all directions 3 S SUBTITLE 5 AS SUBTITIZ AUDIO GC CI gt ANGLE BIE TOP MENU TOP MENU _ MENU LV lt gt ENT e A V lt gt US SOURCE RETURN SOURCE 13 Ol GH RETURN G BAND X gt IT H VOO 149 gt gt Clarion Inserting the Battery 1 Slide the rear cover in the direction of the arrow and remove it 2 Insert the CR2025 battery bundled with the remote control unit in the directions shown in the figure then close the rear cover CR2025 battery Note Using battery improperly can cause it to explode Take note of the following points Do not short circuit disassemble or heat battery Do not dispose of battery into fire or flames Dispose of
225. oice commands available anytime during voice input These are the commonly usable commands in any condition during the voice input operation Operation Command Terminates the voice operation and displays the current location map screen Map Current Position Display Show Map Go to Map Show me Where am Current Location Cancels the immediately precedent voice operation and returns to the previous voice input wait mode Back Displays the next page of voice command list displayed on the screen Next page Displays the previous page of voice command list displayed on the screen Previous page Displays the screen displayed when touching the 2 key Voice Help screen Voice Help What can say Voice commands for changing the map appearance Say Change map view then say the following command Operation Command Displays the 2D map p Displays the 3D map 3D Displays the 2D 2D maps on the split screen split screen 2D and 2D Displays the 2D 3D maps on the split screen split screen 2D and 3D Changes the map orientation to heading up Heading up Changes the map orientation to North up North up Displays the turn list Turn list on Show turn list Hides the turn list Turn list off Hid
226. ong roads with separated lanes for each direction Distance Sets the distance at which the Sound is heard Phone No Registers the telephone number of the Stored Location Group Sets the group the Stored Location belong to Swap Numbers Changes the registration number of an Address Book entry The number of the order of registration is initially specified automatically In order to avoid that entries need to be deleted while changing the registration number numbers can only be swapped with other entries MAX983HD 49 Registering Editing the Data Store to Favourite Registers the Stored Location to the Favourite list Note The Address Book can sorted by the registration number name icon or group So we recommend you set these items for your convenience To edit a Stored Location 1 Touch the Address Book key 2 Touch the name of the Stored Location you wish to edit By touching the Sort key you can change the listing order of the Address Book list Edit data by a similar way as for registering data gt To register Locations Step 3 P 49 Stored Route Registers the current route You can register up to 5 routes and can also edit the registered routes To register the current route Note To register the current route at least one way point is required 1 Touch the Stored Route key 2 Touch the None Add New key 3 On the displayed confirmat
227. ording mode to Auto or Manual When the Auto is set recording CD is automatically performed when a CD is set into the DVD player e The factory default setting is Auto Reloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Adjusting the Monitor Setting the Screen Colour mode The system has two Screen Colour modes the Day mode and the Night mode Each Screen Colour mode has the own dimmer level setting To switch to the Day mode or Night mode manually touch the Day or Night key of the Screen Colour item on the Setting menu When the Auto key is selected the Screen Colour mode is automatically switched according to whether the illumination of the vehicle is turned off or on Monitor settings When you touch the Monitor key from the Setting menu you can adjust the Dimmer Bright Colour Hue and Contrast level of the monitor screen Note Adjusting the Bright Colour Hue and Contrast level is enabled only when a video image is played on this system The dimmer level adjustment operates upon the current Screen Colour mode 1 Touch the Monitor key to display the Monitor menu screen 2 Touch the Dimmer Bright Colour Hue or Contrast key to select adjustment type 3 Touch the or key to adjust the level Bright Adjusts the brightness of the display Press to make image brighter 7 Press to make image dimmer Colour Adjusts the colour saturat
228. ortcut menu 2 Touch the Route key The Route menu screen is displayed 3 Touch the desired menu item For the operation procedure hereafter see the explanation of each section Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Changing Editing the Route Settings Cancelling restarting the route guidance Cancelling the route guidance Terminates the route guidance during the route guidance mode 1 Touch the Cancel Route key A confirmation message is displayed This key is also provided on the Destination menu screen 2 Touch the Yes key The route guidance will be terminated and the destination and route will be deleted Resuming the cancelled route guidance Restores the previous route and restarts the cancelled route guidance 1 Touch the Resume Route key A confirmation message is displayed 2 Touch the Yes key The route guidance will be restarted Changing editing the route Changes or edits the route currently specified 1 Touch the Change Edit key The Change Edit Route menu screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired menu item to select it ER Change Edit Route Back Recalculate Route Detour Traffic Detour Edit Route Store Current Route Please select a menu item Setting the diverting distance Searches for a diverted route where the section from the current location up to the specified distance is avoided 1 Touch the Detour key 2 Touch the distance you want to
229. os n o conduzirem a um desempenho da Base de Dados que esteja em conson ncia com as garantias aqui explicitadas o utilizador poder optar entre receber uma quantia racional a titulo de reembolso pelo pre o pago pela Base de Dados ou rescindir o presente Acordo As op es mencionadas constituem responsabilidade integral da NAVTEQ o nico meio de recurso do utilizador em relac o a NAVTEQ Salvo em caso de indica o expressa nesse sentido na presente sec o a NAVTEQ n o proporciona garantias nem realiza quaisquer representa es no que se refere utiliza o ou aos resultados da utiliza o da Base de Dados em termos da sua correc o exactid o fiabilidade ou quaisquer outras A NAVTEQ n o garante que a Base de Dados se encontre presentemente ou futuramente isenta de erros Nenhuma informa o ou conselho prestado oralmente ou por escrito pela NAVTEQ pelo seu fornecedor ou por qualquer outra pessoa dever ser de molde a constituir uma garantia ou de qualquer outra forma alargar o mbito da garantia limitada acima descrita A garantia limitada constante do presente Acordo n o dever considerar se como afectando ou prejudicando quaisquer direitos que nos termos previstos pela lei o utilizador possa invocar em virtude da garantia legal contra defeitos ocultos Caso n o tenha adquirido a Base de Dados directamente NAVTEQ poder ter direitos estatut rios a serem exercidos contra o intermedi rio junto do qual adquiriu a
230. ots inside the liquid crystal panel are normal for LCD products The touchkeys on the display operate when slightly touched Do not press the touchkey screen with strong force Do not push the case surrounding the touchkey panel with strong force This may cause malfunctioning of the touchkeys Cleaning the unit Cleaning the cabinet Use a soft dry cloth and gently wipe off the dirt For tough dirt apply some neutral detergent diluted in water to a soft cloth wipe off the dirt gently then wipe again with a dry cloth Do not use benzene thinner car cleaner etc as these substances may damage the cabinet or cause the paint to peel Also leaving rubber or plastic products in contact with the cabinet for long periods of time may cause stains Cleaning the liquid crystal panel The liquid crystal panel tends to collect dust so wipe it off occasionally with a soft cloth The surface is easily scratched so do not rub it with hard objects MAX983HD 5 jenuew 5 12UMQ Notes on Data Stored in This System If you transfer or resell this unit to a third party or abandon this unit note the following matters deal with them under your own appropriate management For your privacy protection Initialize delete all data address data etc including private information stored in the hard disk and the memory by the procedures described in this manual For details see Resetting to the Factory Settings P 72
231. ouch the Option key 2 Touch the ON or OFF key of the TV DIVER item to turn this function on and off ON Sets reception emphasising the visual OFF Sets the diver setting to OFF 3 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Setting the TV area When you select the TV area TV reception area the TV tuner area setting changes 1 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen then touch the Option key 2 Touch the Area key of the TV Area item to display a list of country name 3 Touch the desired Country Name key to select a country e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list 4 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen MAX983HD 49 jenuew S I3umg AUX Operations This function is available when the TV tuner is not connected via CeNET and a visual device such as VTR is connected to this unit by using the RCA pin lead WARNING For your safety the driver should not watch the VTR etc or operate the controls while driving Please note that watching and operating the VTR etc while driving are prohibited by law in some countries Selecting the AUX mode Note For your safety this system has a safety function which turns off the picture when the car is moving so only the audio can be heard The picture can only be watched when the car is stopped and the parking brake is applied Pressthe SRC Source button to display the Source menu
232. ov n dzovych slu ieb pol cie po iarnikov nemocn c a zdravotnickych zariaden V t chto situ ci ch sa riad te vlastn m sudkom a pr padne sa sp tajte na cestu okoloid cich Za bezpe nos na ceste nesiete ako vodi v hradn zodpovednos Aby nedo lo k dopravnej nehode alebo dopravn mu priestupku majte v dy na pam ti e aktu lne podmienky na cest ch a dopravn predpisy maj v dy prednos pred inform ciami ulo en mi v naviga nom syst me Z d vodu zastarania datab zy zmeny okolnost alebo povahy zdrojov d t m e software tie obsahovat nepresn alebo ne pln inform cie Sledujte preto po cel dobu jazdy aktu lne dopravn podmienky a dopravn zna enie a dodr iavajte dopravn predpisy Naviga n syst m neobsahuje ani iadnym sp sobom nenahr dza inform cie o dopravn ch predpisoch pecifik ci ch vozidla vr tane v hy v ky rky a n klade obmedzeniach r chlosti podmienkach na cest ch vr tane sklonu st pania a stavu vozovky inform cie o prek kach na ceste napr klad v ku a rku mostov a tunelov ani iadne dal ie be n inform cie o podmienkach jazdy a ciest V dy sa preto spoliehajte na vlastn sudok a sk senosti s riaden m vozidla a re pektujte aktu lnu dopravn situ ciu Sna te sa o najmenej sledova displej za jazdy Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 563 Mjere opreza 4 Upozorenje Ov
233. ower supply lead from this unit Note After connecting the parking brake signal lead pull the parking brake and check that the line falls to ground For your safety some functions will not operate unless the parking brake signal lead is connected correctly Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 89 TANVIN NOILIINNOI JIM ONY NOILYTIVISNI Wire Connection Example of relay usage Use a special installation kit relay lead kit sold separately prepared specifically for your model For applicable models consult the dealer where you purchased this unit Note When connecting the main power supply lead yellow of the main unit connect it to a spare terminal of this unit Vehicle coupler Yellow lt i BET Tan Relay lead Sold separately Conforms to EIAJ standard CP2501 Ground lead from this unit amp ee Tighten with the vehicle side screw and fasten securely to the vehicle metal part Replacing the fuse If the fuse should blow check to see if the wiring is correct If a fuse is blown replace it with a new one of the same amperage rating as the original 10A FUSE To replace the fuse remove the old fuse of the power supply lead and insert the new one Note There are various types of fuse holder Do not let the battery side touch other metal parts A CAUTION After the connection fix the lead by a clamp or insulation tape for protection
234. ows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries pownloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD About the registered marks etc Gracenote End User Licence Agreement Version 20061005 This application or device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this application to perform disc and or file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Gracenote Data from online servers or embedded databases collectively Gracenote Servers and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this application or device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive licence to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your licence terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gr
235. pedance 10 kQ or more Video input 1 0 0 2 Vp p input impedance 75 Q Video Output Video output 1 0 0 2 Vp p output impedance 75 2 LCD Monitor Screen Size 7 inch wide type 156 2 mm Width x 82 3 mm Height Display method Transmission type TN liquid crystal display Drive method TFT thin film transistor active matrix driving Pixels 336 960 480 x 3 RGB x 234 General Power source voltage 14 4 V DC 10 8 to 15 6 V allowable Earth Negative Current consumption 4 3 A 1 W Auto Antenna Rated Current 500 mA less Dimensions of the Main Unit 178 mm Width x 100 mm Height x 162 mm Depth Weight of the Main Unit 3 0 kg OR v 4 v 100 mm Note e Specifications comply with JEITA Standards e Specifications and design are subject to change without notice for further improvement 162mm 171mm 25mm 178 mm Jap wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD INSTALLATION AND WIRE CONNECTION MANUAL Safety Precautions Before use WARNING Confirm the battery voltage of the vehicle to be installed This unit is designed only for vehicles with DC 12V power supply Disconnect the negative terminal of the battery before connecting wires otherwise an electric shock injury by short circuit may occur to Car battery Notes on the place to install to A WARNING e When installing the unit to a vehicle with an airbag system never i
236. points can be specified The specified waypoints are displayed by marks with the ordinal number for visiting Current destination name Waypoint name The edit screen is displayed Only the destination waypoints that have not been passed can be edited MAX983HD 33 Changing Editing the Route Settings Delete Displays a confirmation screen If you touch the Yes key the destination waypoint is deleted You can adjust the location of the destination waypoint by scrolling the map Route calculation condition icon You can change the conditions of route calculation When you change a condition the route is recalculated with the specified condition When waypoints are specified you can set the condition for each section of the route Si Calculates the route of which the reguired time is shortest Ina Calculates the route of which motorways are not used as much as possible ES Calculates the route of which the distance is shortest Storing the current route Stores the current route as the Stored Route gt Stored Route P 50 1 Touch the Store Current Route key A confirmation screen is displayed Touching the Yes key stores the current route Note To register the current route at least one waypoint is required Apwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Setting the conditions of the route calculation You can customise the conditions of the route
237. pp som skall erl ggas till NAVTEQ och eller Er leverant r i enlighet med detta Avtal eller liknande avtal enligt vilka varor tillhandah lls Er BEVILJANDE AV LICENS NAVTEQ beviljar Er en icke exklusiv licens att anv nda Databasen f r Ert personliga bruk eller om till mpligt f r anv ndande inom Ert f retags interna verksamhet Denna licens omfattar inte r tten att bevilja underlicenser BEGR NSNING AV ANV NDNING Databasen f r endast anv ndas i det specifika system f r vilket den framst llts F rutom till den del det uttryckligen till ts av tvingande lag t ex nationella lagar baserade p det Europeiska Datorprogramdirektivet 91 250 och Databasdirektivet 96 9 f r Ni ej g ra utdrag ur eller teranv nda betydande delar av inneh llet i Databasen och ej heller reproducera kopiera modifiera anpassa vers tta demontera dekompilera eller tillbakaassemblera n gon del av Databasen Om Ni nskar erh lla samk rbarhetsinformation s som avses i den natio nella lagen baserad p det Europeiska Datorprogramdirektivet skall Ni ge NAVTEQ sk lig m jlighet att tillhandah lla sagda information p sk liga villkor inkluderande kostnader vilka fastst lls av NAVTEQ VERL TELSE AV LICENS Ni f r inte verl ta Databasen till tredje part f rutom som installerad i det system f r vilket den skapades eller under f ruts ttning att Ni inte beh ller n gon kopia av Databasen och f rutsatt att mottagaren samtycker til
238. r Displays lower case characters input keyboard Upper Displays upper case characters input keyboard All Clear Deletes all characters entered so far A Z Displays the alphabetic input keyboard Accent Displays the accent characters input keyboard 0 9 Displays the number input keyboard Symbols Displays the symbol characters input keyboard OK Fixes the entered characters and returns to the previous screen Touch the Artist key enter edit the artist name by touching the characters on the screen then touch the OK key Edit by the same way as the Album title entry Touch the Genre key touch the desired Genre key you wish to specify then touch the Back key Touch the Image key touch the desired image key then touch the Back key You can assign your imported image data by touching the User key O Editing Track information Track 01 Get Into Please select a menu item 0 00 By touching the Get Info key you can obtain these information automatically from the Album Information data stored in the hard disk drive if they are listed 1 Touch the Track key edit the track title by touching the characters on the screen then touch the OK key Edit by the same way as the Album title entry Touch the Artist key enter edit the artist name by touching the characters on the screen then touch the OK key Edit by the same way as the Album title
239. r lever in which cause it cannot be installed Before installing check that the unit will not hamper operation of the gear lever or obstruct your view before selecting the installation location Dashboard E Gear lever check that it does not touch the operation panel 3 Install the main unit within 30 of the horizontal plane Max 30 4 If you have to do any modification on the car body such as drilling holes consult your car dealer beforehand Prepare all parts necessary for installing the 5 Use the included screws for installation Using other screws may cause damage Chassis Chassis Max 8 mm M5 screw 6 This unit has a fan motor in the back of the main unit When the fan motor vent is covered with leads or mounting bracket it may cause a malfunction Be sure not to cover it when wiring leads Fan motor vent gpwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Installing the Main Unit Installing the Main Unit This unit is designed for fixed installation in the dashboard 1 When installing the main unit in NISSAN vehicles use the parts attached to this unit When installing the main unit in TOYOTA vehicles use the parts attached to the vehicle 2 Wire as shown in the section Wire Connection 3 Reassemble and secure the unit in the dashboard and set the face panel and centre panel Mounting
240. re les vices cach s Si vous n avez pas directement acquis la Base de donn es aupr s de NAVTEQ vous pouvez b n ficier selon les textes en vigueur dans votre pays de droits l gard de la personne aupr s de laquelle vous avez acquis la Base de donn es en plus des droits ci dessus conc d s par NAVTEQ La garantie de NAVTEQ pr vue ci dessus n affectera pas ces droits Vous tes autoris vous pr valoir de tels droits en plus de ceux accord s par la pr sente garantie LIMITE DE RESPONSABILITE Le prix de la Base de donn es n inclut aucune consid ration relative la contrepartie d un quelconque risque li des dommages indirects ou cons cutifs ou des dommages directs illimit s pouvant survenir l occasion de votre utilisation de la Base de donn es Par cons quent NAVTEQ ne sera en aucun cas responsable des dommages cons cutifs ou indirects y compris notamment la perte de profit de donn es ou l impossibilit d utiliser la Base de donn es subis par vous ou tout tiers r sultant de votre utilisation de la Base de donn es et ceci que l action soit intent e sur un fondement contractuel ou d lictuel ou fond e sur une garantie m me si NAVTEQ a t avis de l ventualit de tels dommages En tout tat de cause la responsabilit de NAVTEQ pour tout dommage direct sera limit e au prix de votre copie de la Base de donn es LA GARANTIE LIMIT E AINSI QUE LA LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITE PREVUES D
241. red in this system In addition this system can record the audio data of the disc by compressing into ATRACS format and store them as the Music Catcher data Recording tracks from a CD P 39 Music Catcher Operations P 40 About the track information of the recorded data When the track information can be obtained from the Album Information data this data is used as the track information If not the album title is named using the recording date and a consecutive number such as 2008 6 10 001 and the track title is named such as Track 01 You can edit this information in the Music Catcher mode Editing album track information P 42 Note This system can play back record the CDDA discs and cannot play back record the DTS CD discs Some discs with CCCD or the other format may be able to play back The Gracenote Media Database can be imported into the hard disk drive by using the SD card Importing Data Using the SD Card P 70 Selecting the Audio CD mode 1 Set an audio CD to the DVD player The system will automatically read the disc data change to the Audio CD mode and start playback after a while Setting Ejecting a Disc P 15 And also recording data into the Music Catcher will be automatically started when the CD is not recorded in the Music Catcher You can change the setting so that the recording is not performed automatically but
242. reset channels Preset scan Preset scan shows each preset channel before it automatically advances to the next preset This function is useful for searching for desired TV station in memory 1 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen 2 Touch the PS key to start preset scan The unit starts scanning each station for 7 seconds sequentially 3 When the desired channel is received touch the PS key again Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Setting the TV functions e These operations cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen Selecting the screen size You can change the TV screen size to suit to the screen panel 1 Showing the TV Tuner mode screen touch the Wide key 2 Touch the Wide Cinema or Normal key to set the desired screen size The factory default setting is Wide Wide The image is expanded so that the rectangle of the image fit to the screen The aspect ratio of the image may be changed Cinema The image is expanded so that the left and right edges of the image fit to the screen The top and bottom areas of the image may be cut off Normal The image is expanded so that the top and bottom edges of the image fit to the screen Setting the TV diver You can change the reception setting for the TV antenna connected to the TV tuner e Normally use the TV diver with the ON position 1 Touch the screen to display the TV Tuner mode screen then t
243. rgenza lavori di costruzioni chiusura di strade o corsie limitazioni relative al tipo di veicolo o alla velocit pendenze stradali o declivi altezza larghezza od altri limiti dei ponti condizioni delle strade o del traffico eventi speciali congestioni del traffico o durata del viaggio DIRITTO APPLICABILE Questo contratto sar disciplinato dalle leggi della giurisdizione in cui Lei risiede all acquisto del Database Se in quel momento Lei risiede al di fuori dell Unione Europea o della Svizzera si applicheranno le norme dello Stato membro dell Unione o della Svizzera dove Lei ha acquistato il Database In tutti gli altri casi o se non pu essere stabilito lo Stato nel quale Lei ha acquistato il Database si applicheranno le norme del diritto olandese Tribunali competenti nel luogo della Sua residenza al momento dell acquisto del Database avranno giurisdizione su ogni questione che sorga dal o relativa a questo contratto senza pregiudizio al diritto di NAVTEQ di iniziare l azione nel Suo luogo di residenza attuale Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 575 GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST MET EINDGEBRUIKERS LEES DEZE GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST GOED DOOR VOORDAT U DE NAVTEQ DATABASE GEBRUIKT KENNISGEVING AAN DE GEBRUIKER DIT IS EEN GEBRUIKSRECHTOVEREENKOMST EN GEEN KOOPOVEREENKOMST TUSSEN U EN NAVTEQ B V MET BETREKKING TOT UW EXEMPLAAR VAN DE NAVTEQ WEGENKAARTDATABASE INCLUSIEF VERWANTE COMPUTERSOFTWARE DRAG
244. ring operation completes the registered mobile phone is set as the current telephone and the display returns to the Phone Select screen Youcan delete the registered mobile phone by touching the Delete key on the Phone Select screen ate wnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Telephone Operations Selecting the mobile phone 1 Touch the Phone Select key to display the Phone Select screen 2 Touch the desired Telephone key you wish to use The corresponding mobile phone is set asthe current telephone 3 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Setting the telephone features 1 Touch the Phone Settings key to display the Phone Settings screen E Phone Settings Automatic Connection Auto Answer Microphone Gain Ring Tone Volume Bluetooth Device Information Info Please adjust telephone settings 2 Perform setting for the desired item See the following sections for detail 3 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Setting Automatic Connection The Interface Box automatically reconnects the mobile phone after the connection is lost or the system is restarted The factory default setting is ON 1 Touch the ON or OFF key of the Automatic Connection item to set the function ON or OFF Setting Auto Answer When a call comes in the Interface Box automatically connects the call approx 8 seconds after the calling star
245. row the albums to be listed by specifying the artist name Genres You can narrow the albums to be listed by specifying the genre and artist name Composers You can narrow the albums to be listed by specifying the composer name In addition to the above you can specify the playlist podcast or audiobook to be played back Displaying the iPod Menu screen 1 Touch the MENU key The following iPod Menu screen is displayed 38 iPod Menu Music Albums Artists Genres Tracks Playlists Musi Video Please select a menu item 2 Touch the gt gt Next key to display the next menu screen 38 iPod Menu Music Back Podcasts Composers Audiobooks Please select a menu item Selecting a list item from the list screen 1 Touch the desired Category key from the iPod Menu screen to display the corresponding list screen 2 Touch the desired list item on the screen to specify it e When an album list or playilst is specified the screen returns to the iPod mode screen and playback starts from the first track of the specified album playlist When a list of podcasts or audiobooks is specified the screen returns to the iPod mode screen and the specified track is played back When another list is specified the next list appears Repeat this operation until you select the album to be played back e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list iPod video mode operation only for the iPod wi
246. rtura del rischio relativo a danni conseguenti indiretti o diretti illimitati che possano derivare in relazione all uso che Lei fa del Database Di conseguenza in nessun caso NAVTEQ sar responsabile per alcun danno conseguente o indiretto inclusa senza tassativit la perdita di profitto di dati o dell utilizzo subiti da Lei o da qualsiasi terzo e derivanti dall uso da Lei fatto del Database fatti valere con una azione contrattuale od extra contrattuale oppure basati su una azione in garanzia anche qualora NAVTEQ sia stata avvertita della possibilit di tali danni In ogni caso la responsabilit di NAVTEQ per i danni diretti limitata al costo dalla Sua copia del Database LA GARANZIA LIMITATA E LA LIMITAZIONE DELLA RESPONSABILIT STABILITE IN QUESTO CONTRATTO NON INCIDONO NE PREGIUDICANO I SUOI DIRITTI LEGALI QUALORA LEI ABBIA ACQUISITO IL DATABASE NON NELL ESERCIZIO DI UNA ATTIVIT PROFESSIONALE AVVERTENZA Il Database rispecchia le condizioni esistenti prima che Lei abbia ricevuto il Database e comprende dati ed informazioni dagli organismi pubblici od altre fonti che possono contenere errori od omissioni Di conseguenza il Database pu contenere informazioni non accurate od incomplete a causa del trascorrere del tempo di mutate circostanze e della natura delle fonti utilizzate Il Database non comprende n rispecchia tra l altro informazioni sulla sicurezza del territorio l applicazione della legge assistenza di eme
247. s Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 37 5 Traffic Information The RDS TMC Radio Data System Traffic Message Channel provides various information useful for driving using FM radio transmission The system can receive RDS TMC information and can display the information on traffic conditions congestion forecasts and weather forecasts etc on the screen and on the map By using RDS TMC you can obtain or confirm event information on congestions road works and suspension of traffic etc around the route and the vehicle position When information is received from the RDS TMC the latest receiving time is displayed in the upper part of TMC indicator on the Map screen Note You can set the system to calculate routes that avoid the traffic incidents and congestions etc by using received RDS TMC information When the TMC provider name is included in the received data the TMC indicator on the map contains the TMC provider name For the symbols used for the TMC see Symbols used for TMC traffic information P 15 Displaying the Traffic Information RDS TMC menu screen RDS TMC Back Traffic Info Nearby Traffic Info on Route Traffic Info on Map Weather Traffic User Forecast Locations TMC Traffic Info Settings Please select a menu item 1 Press the j INFO button The RDS TMC menu screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired item and confirm the information Note B
248. s omic le aa alal ile 44 AUdio SEeningsi FEESFSELS ro 48 Adjusting the Monitor ie 48 User Settings EE 48 Registering Editing the Data 49 Importing Data Using the SD Card nenn 51 Service Options iii 52 Setting Safety Camera iii 53 Favourite Frequent List Operations 54 What is Favourite Freguent List 54 Using Favourite Frequent List Voice Command Operations Voice Command Features List of the Voice Commands Navigation Features 59 Notes on the Voice Command Operations 61 Others cirie lievi 62 Troubleshooting cisco u een 62 Error Messages ss sms siunaa eine 62 About th Positioning EOF 22222 seere geen oetans ac 63 MAX983HD 5 2 Basic Operations See the Audio Manual for the procedure to turn the power on off and the details of controls on the Operation Panel Switching the Operation Mode To switch between the Navigation screen and Audio screen press the NAVI Navi AV button Menu Types and Operation This section explains the types of the typical menu screens on the touch panel and their operation Destination menu Pressing the MENU button displays the Destination menu screen By touching the desired menu item you can display menu screens and perform operations of entering a destination Touching the menu item on the lower part of the screen displays each menu screen For the entering procedure of the destination see Outline of De
249. s made in the body of the vehicle should be sealed with a silicon adhesive If exhaust fumes or water penetrates into the vehicle this may cause an accident Fasten the bolts securely when installing the unit If the bolts are loose an accident or malfunction may occur MAX983HD 79 s BE 33 OO ER TYNNYIN NOILIINNOI SHIM ANY NOILYTIVISNI Safety Precautions Wire connection notes A WARNING Loom all cables according to the instruction manual so as not to hinder operation Wire the connecting cables away from high temperature areas If the coatings of the cables melt it may cause an accident fire by a short circuit Take care when wiring in the engine compartment When wiring the connecting cables in a vehicle with an airbag system never feed the cables through a place where it may interfere with the operation of the airbag If the airbag not operating correctly in an emergency it may cause increased injury A CAUTION Connect cables appropriately If a wrong connection is made this may cause a fire or accident When passing cables through the body of the vehicle use non conductive grommets If the coatings of the cables are worn out by rubbing this may cause an accident fire or a short circuit After wiring cables fix them with insulation tape Be sure to switch off the vehicle when connecting or disconnecting cables to from the unit otherwise an electr
250. s the functions and operation procedures of the AV features In addition the general precautions and other information on using this system are also explained in this manual Navigation System Operation Manual This manual hereinafter referred to as Navigation Manual explains the functions and operation procedures of the navigation features Notes on Handling Note This manual is described on the assumption that the default Skin data has been applied When the other Skin data is applied the screen design and shapes of icons will be different from the contents listed in this manual Please be aware that the device may be different from the manual according to the changes of the specifications Symbols used in this manual Note Lists what should be noted when operating or referential information button Indicates a button on this unit key Indicates a menu item on the screen gt Indicates a title and page number on which recommended reference information is described In no event shall Clarion be liable for any incidental damage including but not limited to loss of the business profit or change loss of the data caused from use or inability to use of this product About this system O Important To prevent discharge of the car battery use this system with the engine of the vehicle running The housing of this unit may become hot because this unit has a high speed CPU
251. s to make a call are disabled when no connection with a mobile phone is established The 88 icon is displayed at the bottom of the screen when the connection with a mobile phone is established It blinks during the connection operation Telephone settings Registering your mobile phone Pairing You can register up to 5 mobile phones 1 Turn on the power of the mobile phone you wish to register 2 Touch the Phone Select key to display the Phone Select screen 3 Touch the Add key to display the Add New Device screen 4 Touch one of item keys to specify the device type Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list When the device type of your mobile phone is not listed select the General Device key 5 Touch the Search or Wait key Search The Interface Box starts searching a mobile phone Wait The Interface Box waits to be detected by a mobile phone When mobile phones are detected the Device Select screen is displayed 6 Touch the desired device key you wish to register then enter the Pass key code on your i mobile phone For the Pass key code see the operation manual of the Bluetooth Interface Box You can also confirm the Pass key code by the Bluetooth Device Information screen under the Phone Settings menu Perform the Object Push transfer operation when your mobile phone requires it For details of the operation see the operation manual of your mobile phone When the pai
252. s which are responded when using voice commands Blinking LED When this function is set to ON the Blinking LED indicator will blink when the power is turned off Antenna Select the Auto Antenna when your vehicle has the auto antenna Note When the Auto Antenna is selected you can extend collapse the antenna by keeping pressing the 1 INFO button more than 2 seconds Be sure to collapse the antenna before entering in a place with low ceiling such as a multistory car park Select Others for the vehicle equipped with no auto antenna Otherwise the radio reception may be disturbed extremely Security Mode To set this function ON setting a PIN code called as Personal Code is required When you set your Personal Code a theft is prevented by disabling the operation of the unit In addition set the Blinking LED function to ON to improve the effect of this function Setting the Security Mode 1 Touch the ON key of the Security Mode item The Set Code screen appears 2 Enter your desired 4 digit Personal Code by using Ten Key pad displayed on the screen then touch the OK key Touch the lt q key when you make a mistake in entering 3 Enter the same Personal Code again for confirmation then touch the OK key The entered Personal Code will be set and it will return to the previous screen Resetting the Security Mode 1 Touch the OFF key of the Security Mode it
253. seconds Changing the map appearance P 16 D View key Touch this for changing the appearance of the map gt Changing the map appearance P 16 Map scale Indicates the scale of the map currently displayed Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals N260A AVIINUE DU PORT Map bearing mark GPS receiving status Indicates the map orientation You can switch the map orientation between Heading Up and North Up by touching this icon Changing the map appearance P 16 In addition the receiving status of the GPS signal is indicated by coloured three dots under the bearing mark Blue Receiving in 3D Yellow Receiving in 2D Grey No signal received TMC indicator The TMC indicator turns to green and the time that data was received in last is indicated in the upper area while receiving TMC information 3 5 Traffic Information P 38 MAX983HD 11 Map Screen Features Indicators on the scrolled map Indicators are displayed after scrolling the map During scrolling only the scroll cursor is displayed on the map Nine nan Road _51 28 44N 0 00 24W THE AVENUE Back key Returns to the map of current location OK key Displays the Location menu You can set the location under the cursor as the destination or store this location Location menu Menu on scrolled map P 9 Scroll cursor Displayed when scrolling the map A
254. set joiden perusteella h n on vastaanottanut tuotteet velvoittaa h net maksamaan K YTT OIKEUDEN MY NT MINEN NAVTEQ my nt k ytt j lle ei yksinomaisen oikeuden tietokannan henkil kohtaiseen k ytt n tai soveltuvissa tapauksissa k ytt j n yrityksen sis iseen k ytt n T m k ytt oikeus ei sis ll oikeutta my nt alilisenssej K YT N RAJOITUKSET Tietokanta on tarkoitettu k ytett v ksi vain siin tietyss j rjestelm ss jota varten se on tehty Ellei pakottavasta lains d nn st esimerkiksi EU n ohjelmistodirektiiviin 91 250 ETY ja tietokantadirektiiviin 96 9 EY perustuvista kansallisista laeista muuta seuraa k ytt j ei saa kopioida tai k ytt uudelleen tietokannan sis ll n olennaisia osia eik toisintaa kopioida muuttaa muuntaa k nt palauttaa assembler tai l hdekielelle tai aukikoodata mit n tietokannan osaa Jos k ytt j haluaa saada EU n ohjelmistodirektiiviss tai siihen perustuvassa kansallisessa lains d nn ss tarkoitettuja yhteentoimivuustietoja h nen tulee antaa NAVTEGille riitt v tilaisuus toimittaa kysytyt tiedot kohtuullisin NAVTEQin m r min ehdoin joihin sis ltyy kohtuullinen korvaus K YTT OIKEUDEN SIIRT MINEN K ytt j ei saa siirt tietokantaa kolmannelle osapuolelle paitsi kun se on asennettuna j rjestelm n jota varten se on tehty tai kun k ytt j lle ei j siirron j lkeen yht n tietokannan kopiota j
255. seu fornecedor em conformidade com o presente Acordo ou gualguer outro acordo semelhante ao abrigo do gual os produtos Ihe sejam fornecidos CONCESS O DE LICENCA A NAVTEQ concede lhe uma licen a n o exclusiva de utiliza o da Base de Dados para fins pessoais ou caso tal se aplique para uma utilizac o no mbito das operac es levadas a cabo internamente pela sua empresa Na presente licenga n o est inclu do o direito concess o de sublicengas RESTRI ES DE UTILIZA O A utiliza o da Base da Dados limitada ao sistema espec fico para o qual foi criada Excepto na medida em que tal seja expressamente permitido pelas disposi es legais de aplica o obrigat ria por exemplo legisla o nacional baseada na Directiva n 91 250 CE relativa ao regime de protec o jur dica dos programas de computador e na Directiva n 96 9 CE relativa protec o jur dica das Bases de Dados o utilizador n o dever extrair ou reutilizar partes significativas do conte do da Base de Dados nem reproduzir copiar modificar adaptar traduzir desmontar ou decompor nem efectuar opera es de invers o de engenharia de qualquer parte da Base de Dados Se desejar obter informa o sobre a sua interoperabilidade nos termos a que se refere a Directiva Europeia relativa a Programas de Computador Directiva em cuja legisla o nacional est baseada dever pois conceder NAVTEQ a oportunidade de facultar a referida informa o segun
256. sh to go to select it by Dist The list is sorted by nearby order after pressing this key This key is displayed when the list is set to the order along the road on the Way The list is sorted by order along the road after pressing this key This key is displayed when the list is set to the nearby order 9 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the OK key 10 Touch the Start key By Intersection You can specify an intersection as destination by entering the two crossing street names and set them as destination 1 Touch the gt gt Next key 2 Touch the Intersection key 3 Touch the Country key then touch the country name if necessary 4 Touch the City key enter the city name then touch the OK key The city name entry can be omitted 5 From the displayed City list touch the city to select it 6 Touch the 1st Street key enter the street name then touch the OK key 7 Fromthe displayed Street list touch the street to select it 8 Select the 2nd Street by a similar procedure as for the 1st Street 9 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the OK key 10 Touch the Start key Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals By Stored Routes Selects a route previously registered then set it as the new route Note To use this function one or more registered routes are required When a route is currently set you can register this route by to
257. specified key character Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list MAX983HD 43 jenuew saumo jenuew S I3umg Music Catcher Operations Searching by Genre 1 N ww Touch the Genres key on the Music Search screen The Genre list is displayed Touch the desired Genre key you wish to search data The Artist list of the specified genre is displayed e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list Touch the desired Artist key you wish to search data The Album list of the specified artist is displayed with the order of recorded date Selecting All Artists key specifies all the artists of the specified genre Touching the alphabet key displayed at the right of the screen scrolls the list to the first item of which the initial character of the artist name matches to the specified key character Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list Touch the desired Album key you wish to play back Selecting All Albums key specify all the album data of the specified artist You can change the album to play by the album skip operation Touching the by Name key sorts the list by the alphanumerical order of the album title In this list touching the alphabet key displayed at the right of the screen scrolls the list to the first item of which the initial character of the album title matches to the specified key character Touch the A or 4 key to scroll the list Searching by Album Image
258. ss screen in any mode OUT Zoom Out button Press this button to decrease the map scale and to show a wider area of the map when the map is displayed Keep pressing this button to enter the Free Zoom mode IN Zoom In button Pressthis button to increase the map scale and to show a more detailed map when the map is displayed Keep pressing this button to enter the Free Zoom mode MENU button Press this button to display hide the Destination menu screen in any mode Volume buttons e Use these buttons to increase decrease the volume VOICE button Press this button to display the Voice Command menu screen and activate the voice command function jenuew s 1aumg Rp vnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Menu Types and Operation This section explains the types of the typical menu screens on the touch panel and their operation Source menu Pressing the SRC Source button when the AV feature is turned on displays the Source menu screen You can change the media sources or control the 2Zone function by touching the desired menu item Selecting Media Source P 18 2Zone Function P 19 52 Source Back FM AM Music SD Card Catcher Telephone 2Zone Please select a source AV mode menus Selecting a media source from the Source menu screen displays the AV mode menu screen of the selected source mode When the Navigation mode screen is
259. ssa NAVTEQin korvausvastuu v litt mien vahinkojen tapauksessa rajoittuu k ytt j n hankkiman tietokannan hintaan T SS SOPIMUKSESSA ESITETTY RAJOITETTU TAKUU JA VASTUUVELVOLLISUUDEN RAJOITUS EIV T VAIKUTA K YTT J N LAKIS TEISIIN OIKEUKSIIN JOS TIETOKANTA ON HANKITTU MUUTA TARKOITUSTA KUIN AMMATINHARJOITUSTA VARTEN VAROITUKSIA Ajan tuomista muutoksista olosuhteiden muuttumisesta k ytetyist l hteist ja kattavan maantieteellisen tiedon keruun luonteesta johtuen tietokanta saattaa sis lt ep tarkkoja tai ep t ydellisi tietoja ja antaa virheellisi tuloksia Tietokanta ei sis ll tietoja muun muassa tieymp rist n turvallisuudesta poliisin saatavillaolosta avunannosta h t tapauksissa tiet ist teiden tai kaistojen sulkemisesta ajoneuvo tai nopeusrajoituksista teiden jyrkkyydest ja kaltevuudesta alikulkukorkeuksista paino tai muista rajoituksista tie tai liikenneolosuhteista erikoistapahtumista ruuhkista tai matkustusajoista SOVELLETTAVA LAKI T h n sopimukseen sovelletaan sen maan lakia jossa k ytt j ll on kotipaikka tietokannan hankintap iv n Jos k ytt j n kotipaikka on sill hetkell Euroopan unionin tai Sveitsin ulkopuolella sovelletaan sen maan lakia jossa k ytt j hankki tietokannan Muissa tapauksissa tai jos tietokannan hankintapaikkaa ei voida m ritell sovelletaan Alankomaiden lakia T st sopimuksesta aiheutuvat tai siihen liittyv t erimielisyydet ratkaistaa
260. st 001 Intro 002 You Ain t Right 003 All For You 004 2Way For You Interlude 005 Come On Get Up Please select a track Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Selecting the track of starting playback 1 Displaying the Track List screen touch the desired Track key you wish to play The system starts playback from the specified track e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list 2 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Displaying the track information 1 Displaying the Track List screen touch the desired Track key you wish to display information e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list 2 Touch the key displayed at the right of the Track key The track information of specified track is displayed Album All For You Track Intro Artist Janet Jackson 3 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Scrolling titles When a title or other information displayed on the screen is longer than the text area you can confirm the entire text by scrolling it 1 Displaying the text you wish to scroll touch the key displayed at the right of the text area The text will scroll once MAX983HD 53 jenuew saumo jenuew s 1aumg iPod Operations iPod Menu operation You can specify the album to play by narrowing the following categories Albums The album list of all the albums recorded in the iPod is displayed Artists You can nar
261. stination Entering Procedures P 19 and 3 Entering the Destination P 22 A Destination Cancel Route Address Address Book Points of Interest Nearby POI Home gt Add New i Destination Music Search p Please select a menu item S key Telephone key Displays the Favourite list menu screen Displays the Telephone menu screen Favourite Frequent menu P 7 7 Telephone Operations Audio Manual Favourite Freguent List Operations P 54 A Back key Music Search key Returns to the previous screen Displays the Music Search menu screen Music Catcher Operations Audio Manual Cancel Route key N Terminates the route guidance during the route guidance mode Cancelling the route guidance P 33 pownloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Menu Types and Operation Favourite Frequent menu Touching the EZ key in the Destination menu or in the Navi Shortcut menu displays the Favourite list menu screen Your favourite places can be registered in the Favourite list and places often visited are automatically registered in the Freguent list From the 3D List screen of the Favourite Freguent list menu you can enter a destination by an easy operation From the 2D List screen you can edit the list items by drag and drop operations For details see 7 Favourite Freguent List Operations P 54 FUJI SAN SW1
262. t verkrijgen van de Database DE BEPERKTE GARANTIE EN DE BEPERKING VAN AANSPRAKELIJKHEID ZOALS OPGENOMEN IN DEZE OVEREENKOMST LATEN ONVERLET ALLE RECHTEN DIE U KUNT ONTLENEN AAN EVENTUEEL TOEPASSELIJKE DWINGENDRECHTELIJKE WETGEVING WANNEER U DE DATABASE ANDERS DAN IN DE UITOEFENING VAN EEN BEDRIJF HEBT VERKREGEN WAARSCHUWINGEN De Database is een weergave van de realiteit zoals die bestond voordat u de Database verkreeg en deze is opgebouwd uit gegevens en informatie van de overheid en andere bronnen die onjuist of onvolledig kunnen zijn Door verloop van tijd gewijzigde omstandigheden of vanwege de aard van de bronnen is het derhalve mogelijk dat de Database onjuiste of onvolledige gegevens of informatie bevat De Database bevat of geeft onder meer geen van de volgende categorie n informatie weer veiligheid van de omgeving beschikbaarheid of nabijheid van politie hulp in noodgevallen constructiewerkzaamheden weg en rijstrookafsluitingen voertuig en snelheidsbeperkingen helling shoek van de weg beperkingen met betrekking tot onder andere maximale hoogte van viaducten of maximaal gewicht op bruggen weg of verkeersomstandigheden bijzondere gebeurtenissen verkeersopstoppingen of reistijd TOEPASSELIJK RECHT Deze Overeenkomst wordt beheerst door het recht van het land waar u woont op de dag van verkrijging van de Database In het geval dat u op dat moment buiten de Europese Unie of Zwitserland woont is het recht van het land binnen
263. t I Search button during playback Tracks are skipped as many as the times pressing the button and playback starts e Pressing the gt gt I button starts playback from the beginning of the next track Pressing the 144 button starts playback from the beginning of the current track When pressing this button again within about 2 seconds playback starts from the beginning of the previous track To perform this operation from the AV Shortcut menu screen use the Track keys instead of the I lt and gt gt Search buttons Fast forward and fast backward 1 Keep pressing the I lt or gt gt I Search button during playback The playback speed becomes 5 times faster at first and then 20 times faster 3 seconds later Releasing the button resumes the normal speed playback e To perform this operation from the AV Shortcut menu screen use the Track keys instead of the 14 and PPI Search buttons Selecting a track from the List screen 1 Touch the List key The Track list screen appears 2 Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list and touch the desired Track key The corresponding track is started playback Tracks with the icon indicate that the track has been recorded in the Music Catcher Tracks with the G key indicate the track information can be displayed using the Album Information data or logged data in the Music Catcher 3 Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen
264. ta e incompleta debido al paso del tiempo la alteraci n de las circunstancias y a la naturaleza de las fuentes empleadas La Base de datos no contiene ni refleja informaci n sobre por ejemplo la seguridad de la zona el cumplimiento de la ley la asistencia en casos de emergencia obras en construcci n cierres de v as o carriles restricciones de velocidad o de veh culos declive de la v a y grado de la pendiente limitaciones con respecto a la altura o peso permitido en puentes condiciones viales o de tr fico acontecimientos especiales atascos o duraci n del viaje LEGISLACI N APLICABLE El presente Contrato se regir por las leyes de la jurisdicci n donde usted resida en la fecha de adquisici n de la Base de datos Si en la citada fecha reside fuera de la Uni n Europea o de Suiza se aplicar la legislaci n de la jurisdicci n de la Uni n Europea o de Suiza donde haya adquirido la Base de datos En todos los dem s casos o si no es posible establecer la jurisdicci n donde ha adquirido la Base de datos se aplicar la legislaci n de los Pa ses Bajos El juez competente en su lugar de residencia en la fecha de adquisici n de la Base de datos deber estar facultado para pronunciarse sobre cualquier conflicto derivado del presente Contrato o relacionado con l sin detrimento del derecho de NAVTEQ a presentar reclamaciones judiciales en el lugar donde usted resida en dicho momento Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MA
265. tabasen er begr nset til brug i det p g ldende system for hvilket den blev oprettet Med undtagelse af det i de pr ceptive love dvs nationale love baseret p R dets direktiv 91 250 om retlig beskyttelse af edb programmer og Europa Parlamentets og R dets direktiv 96 9 om retlig beskyttelse af databaser udtrykkeligt tilladte omfang m du ikke uddrage eller genanvende v sentlige dele af Databasen indhold ej heller duplikere kopiere modificere justere overs tte demontere dekompilere foretage reverse engineering af nogen del af Databasen Dersom du nsker interoperabilitet som defineret i nationale love der er baseret p direktivet om retlig beskyttelse af edb programmer skal du give NAVTEQ rimelig lejlighed til at frembringe n vnte informationer p rimelige betingelser herunder ogs omkostninger som skal fasts ttes af NAVTEQ OVERDRAGELSE AF LICENS Du har ikke ret til at overdrage Databasen til tredjepersoner undtagen hvis den er installeret p det system for hvilket den var oprettet eller hvis du ikke tilbageholder nogen kopi af Databasen og forudsat at erhververen accepterer alle vilk r og betingelser i denne slutbrugerlicensaftale og skriftligt bekr fter dette over for NAVTEQ Multi disk s t kan kun overdrages eller s lges som de af NAVTEQ leverede komplette s t og ikke som unders t deraf BEGR NSET GARANTI Med forbehold for nedenst ende advarsler garanterer NAVTEQ for en periode af 12 m neder efter du har k
266. tai kirjallinen informaatio tai ohje ei luo mit n takuuta eik laajenna mill n lailla edell kuvatun rajoitetun takuun kattavuutta T ss sopimuksessa esitetty rajoitettu takuu ei vaikuta piilovikoja koskeviin oikeuksiin joita pakottava lains d nt goaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD mahdollisesti takaa k ytt j lle Jos k ytt j ei ole hankkinut tietokantaa suoraan NAVTEGilta h nell saattaa olla NAVTEQin takaamien oikeuksin lis ksi kansallisen lains d nn n takaamia oikeuksia siihen henkil n n hden jolta h n on hankkinut tietokannan Edell esitetty NAVTEOin takuu ei vaikuta n ihin lakis teisiin oikeuksiin ja k ytt j voi vedota niihin edell my nnettyjen takuuoikeuksien lis ksi VASTUUNRAJOITUKSET Tietokannan hintaan ei sis lly mit n katetta sellaisten v lillisten tai seurannaisvahinkojen tai rajoittamattomien v litt mien vahinkojen varalta jotka ovat seurausta tietokannan k yt st T st seuraa ett NAVTEO ei miss n tapauksessa vastaa v lillisist tai seurannaisvahingoista mukaan lukien muun muassa liikevaihdon tietojen tai k ytt mahdollisuuden menetykset jotka kohdistuvat k ytt j n tai kolmanteen osapuoleen ja aiheutuvat tietokannan k yt st riippumatta siit tapahtuvatko vahingot sopimuksen piiriss sopimusta loukaten tai takuuseen perustuen vaikka NAVTEGille olisi etuk teen ilmoitettu t llaisten vahinkojen mahdollisuudesta Kaikissa tapauksi
267. tar alle vilk r i denne Avtalen og bekrefter dette skriftlig til NAVTEQ Sett med flere disker kan kun overf res eller selges som ett komplett sett slik det ble levert av NT og ikke som noe delsett av dette BEGRENSET GARANTI NAVTEO garanterer at med forbehold for advarslene angitt nedenfor over et tidsrom p 12 m neder etter at du har kjopt din kopi av Databasen vil denne i alt vesentlig ha den ytelse som fremg r av NAVTEQs Kriterier for n yaktighet og fullstendighet i kraft p den datoen du kj pte Databasen Disse kriteriene er tilgjengelige fra NAVTEQ p foresporsel Skulle Databasen ikke gi den ytelsen som overensstemmer med denne begrensede garantien skal NAVTEQ gj re sitt beste innen rimelighetens grenser for reparere eller skifte ut din uoverensstemmende kopi av Databasen Hvis disse forsgkene ikke f rer til at Databasen gir den ytelsen som tilsvarer garantiene i dette dokumentet vil du ha valget mellom enten motta en rimelig refusjon av belgpet du betalte for Databasen eller oppheve denne Avtalen Dette skal v re NAVTEOs fulle ansvar og ditt eneste rettsmiddel mot NAVTEQ Med unntak bruk av resultatene av bruken av Databasen hva ang r dennes korrekthet noyaktighet p litelighet eller p annen mate NAVTEQ garanterer ikke at Databasen er eller kommer til v re feilfri Ingen muntlig eller skriftlig informasjon eller r dgivning gitt av NAVTEQ din leverand r eller noen annen part skal anses utgj re en garanti
268. tarts Touch the List Edit key to display the e e Pressing the bb button starts playback Album list screen or Playlist screen 3 from the beginning of the next track e Moreover touch desired Album Playlist key Pressing the Ht 4 button starts playback to display the Track list screen 3 from the beginning of the current track e Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list E When pressing this button again within 2 Touch the key displayed at the rightof about 2 seconds playback starts from the beginning of the previous track To perform this operation from the AV Shortcut menu screen use the Track keys the desired item key The information of specified item is displayed Album information screen instead of ine 44 and gt gt Search 001 A Girl Like Me A Girl Like Me Bonus Tracks Rihanma is Tracks Rihanna Back buttons i H Album A Girl Like Me Bonus Trac O e These functions perform in the current album playlist only Artist Rihanna Genre Blues Fast forward and fast backward Image No Image 1 Keep pressing the 144 or gt gt Search Get Into button during playback Please select a menu item 0 00 The playback speed becomes 5 times faster at first and then 10 times faster 3 seconds later 01 My Favourite Numbers Releasing the button resumes the normal Be speed playback e To perform this operation from the AV viin A in a Shortcut menu screen use the Track keys instead
269. tem Please select a menu item 0 00 A v AT I 3 Confirm the displayed country name the Scrolls the list by one page previous country name is displayed If the 5 Touch the City key country name you wish to go to is not Note displayed touch the Country key otherwise You can omit the city name entry and directly enter proceed to the step 5 a road name AP Address KS Address Country UNITED KINGDOM Country UNITED KINGDOM City All City All Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Street House No Please select a menu item Street House Wo Please select a menu item MAX983HD 1 9 Outline of Destination Entering Procedures 6 Enter the city name you wish to go to by touching the characters on the screen then touch the OK key City LON All Cities Last 5 Cities Accent 0 9 Symbols O Please enter a city name Deletes the last entered character Back Returns to the previous screen All Cities Specify all cities of the specified country for the search Last 5 Cities Displays the list of five city names recently used Touch desired city name you wish to go to All Clear Deletes all characters entered so far A Z Displays the alphabetic input keyboard Accent Displays the accent characters input keyboard 0 9 Displays the number input keyboard Symbols Displays the symbol characters input keyboard OK Searches the map database using entered chara
270. th the country code DVD Video Operations Watching a DVD Video After disc loading the play mode is automatically engaged e When playback is not started touch the gt II key Operations may differ depending on the story of the disc When the menu screen is displayed For general DVD Video discs the DVD menu screen may appear After the DVD menu screen is displayed select an item in the operations described as follows Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Selecting the screen size You can change the screen size to suit to the playback film This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Showing the DVD Video mode screen touch the ES key 2 Touch the Wide Cinema or Normal key to set the desired screen size The factory default setting is Wide Wide The image is expanded so that the rectangle of the image fits to the screen The aspect ratio of the image may be changed Cinema The image is expanded so that the left and right edges of the image fit to the screen The top and bottom areas ofthe image may be cut off Normal The image is expanded so that the top and bottom edges of the image fit to the screen DVD menu operations e These operations cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen O Showing the DVD menu 1 Showing the DVD Video mode screen touch the Top Menu or Menu key during playback The DVD menu appears e The displ
271. th video features When you connect an iPod with video features by using the optional connector cable for iPod with video you can enjoy the video data and slideshow data stored in the iPod showing them on the display of this unit Note For the information on the compatible models to the iPod video mode operations see the Clarion homepage http www clarion com Do not connect the iPod to this unit when a Video Playlists item is selected on the iPod Set the Video Settings of the iPod to TV Out On and TV Signal PAL before playing the visual data stored in the iPod 1 Touch the MENU key to display the iPod Menu screen 2 Touch the Video key to change to the Video mode The screen will be changed to the iPod mode screen with the small video screen displayed on the information pane In this condition the iPod is turned into the normal operation mode and you can control the iPod using the original controls of the iPod iPod operation mode In the iPod operation mode the following buttons on this unit and its remote control unit are operative as well 144 PP gt 11 this unit 149 gt gt gt H remote control unit 82pwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD iPod Operations Note The Video key is displayed only when a fifth generation iPod is connected to the unit 3 Play back your desired video data or slideshow data from the iPod The spe
272. the User Locations key The User Locations list and the map around the User Location is displayed 2 Touch the desired User Location The map moves and you can identify the TMC event by the TMC traffic information symbol Ga User Locations ABBEY RD KILBUR EN 2 CLEAVER STREET O HEATHROW LOND O 4 LEICESTER SO LEL 5 None Add New eS O Please select a location 0 00 You can edit register a User Location by touching the desired list item User Location name The Edit User Location screen is displayed You can edit a registered User Location e Rename Changes the User Location name e Delete Deletes the User Location e OK Terminates the editing then returns to the previous screen Changes the location of the User Location by scrolling the map None Add New You can register a new User Location by the procedures similar to entering the destination Setting TMC traffic information 1 Touch the TMC Traffic Info Settings key The TMC Traffic Info Settings menu screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired key on the screen to set it gt lt TMC Traffic Info Settings Traffic Info on Map Traffic Info Selectlon Select Select TMC Provider Select O Please select a menu item Traffic Info on Map Switches ON and OFF the TMC traffic information display on the map The factory setting is ON Traffic Info Selection Switches ON and OFF the ev
273. the centre of the road Lead holder Shows an example in case of the left hand traffic Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 85 MAX983HD TYNNYIN NOILO3NNO9 JIM ONY NOILYTIV ISNI Installing the Microphone for Voice Control Note Wipe off the dirt of the mounting surface before installing the microphone Stick the double sided tape to the bottom face of the microphone Attach the microphone on a flat surface of the steering column or dashboard close to the driver Turn the microphone towards the mouth of the person who operates the system Connect the microphone extension lead to the microphone as required Fasten the lead using the lead holders O Ps O N 6 Lead holders Microphone for voice control 7 Double sided tape for microphone Connecting the Speed Sensor Note Take care when connecting to the EC Engine Control Computer vehicle speed signal line 1 Confirm the position of the EC Engine Control Computer and the vehicle speed signal line referring to your car make model 2 Remove the vehicle parts and confirm the position of the vehicle speed signal line of the EC 3 Connectthe vehicle speed signal line and the speed sensor connection lead of the vehicle signal lead of this unit using the electro tap for speed sensor 4 Connect the negative terminal of the battery and start the engine Drive the vehicle slowly and check that the signals are proportional to the vehicl
274. the TA Alarm or PTY interrupt ends the volume returns to the level before the interrupt 32pwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD DVD Video Operations About the DVD video features This unit provides the following functions in addition to the high image quality and sound quality of DVD video Note The functions described in this section differ depending on the DVD video disc Refer to the instructions provided with the DVD video Some disc functions may operate differently from those described in this manual Multi sound function DVD video can store up to 8 languages for one film select the language of your preference The languages stored on the disc are indicated by the icon shown below OM Multi angle function Multi sound function A DVD video that is recorded from multiple angles allows you to select the angle of choice e The number of recorded angles is indicated by the icon shown below Subpicture subtitles function A DVD video can record subtitles for up to 32 languages and you can select the language of the subtitles you wish to see e The number of recorded subtitle languages is indicated by the icon shown below Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Multi story function When a DVD video contains more than one story for a film you can select the story you wish to enjoy The operation procedures vary with the disc observe the instructions for selecting a stor
275. the distance is shortest 3 Touch the OK key The Set Route menu screen is displayed Touching the Start key starts the route guidance with the route you have selected Storing the track travelled You can register the track which is the travelled path on the vehicle up to the current car position Note The track is automatically recorded from the place of departure up to 100 km and the current tracking from the current location up to 20 km can be registered for up to five tracks You can select whether to display track traveled or not and you can also register edit it from the Navigation or the Stored Data of the Setting menu gt Tracking Display Settings P 46 1 Touch the Store Tracking key A confirmation screen is displayed Touching the Yes key stores the current track MAX983HD 35 Notes on the Route Guidance When you enterthe destination be sure to stop the vehicle in a safe place The displayed route is only a suggested route Roads can change every day and may have changed in geometries and traffic regulations from the date the map data is created Be sure to follow the actual traffic regulations lt may take a little time until the suggested route is displayed according to the situation Even when the destination is entered by the Stored Routes the current location map screen is displayed When the starting point is set to a remote position from the vehicle position the route ma
276. the intersection map Map Guidance Settings P 44 03D Junction View While travelling on the motorway when you get near to approx 1 km or 1 mile from the next guidance point with junctions the screen will be divided into two displays and the information of the junction with a 3D image will be displayed on the left display FE 1 52 200km Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Small Turn Arrow on Map The turning direction and distance of the next guidance point is displayed at the upper left of the screen N El LS fo a 77 A te LI mot a Payntoti C10 P 2 43 292km MAX983HD 3 1 About the Voice Guidance After starting the route guidance not only guidance by screen but also guidance by voice such as the turning direction or the distance to the guidance point will be given when you get near to the guidance point You can set whether to use the voice guidance or not and set the volume to be changed according to the vehicle speed Guidance Voice Settings P 44 Changing Editing the Route Settings From the Route menu editing the current route confirming the route information setting the conditions of the route calculation etc can be performed Route menu screen Route Back Cancel Route Change Edit Route Priority Route More Routes Store Tracking Information Please select a menu item 1 Touch the NAVI key on the Map screen to display the Navi Sh
277. ti Napotek vsebovan v navigacijskem sistemu se Steje le kot priporo ilo a Lahko pride do situacije ko navigacijski sistem uporabnika vozila ne postavi na pravo lokacijo mu ne pokaze najkrajse moZne poti in ali uporabnika vozila ne usmeri do Zeljenega cilja potovanja V takih primerih naj se uporabnik zanese na svojo osebno presojo pri tem pa naj uposteva trenutne razmere na cesti Uporabnik ne sme uporabljati navigacijskega sistema za usmerjanje v primeru iskanja storitev nujne sluzbe Podatkovna baza ne vsebuje popolnega seznama vseh lokacij nujnih slu b kot so npr policija gasilci bolnice in klinike V takSnih primerih naj uporabnik uporabi lastno presojo in sposobnost ter v takih primerih prosi za pomo pri usmeritvah Kot voznik je uporabnik sam odgovoren za svojo prometno varnost Da se izogne nastanku prometne nesre e ali storitvi prometnega prekr ka naj uporabnik upo teva da imajo dejanske razmere na cesti in prometni predpisi prednost pred informacijami vsebovanimi v navigacijskem sistemu V tej zvezi programska oprema lahko vsebuje neto ne ali nepopolne podatke zaradi poteka asa sprememb okoli in in glede na vire ki jih uporablja Prosimo uporabnika da ves as vo nje upo teva dejanske prometne okoli ine in predpise Navigacijski sistem v nobenem primeru ne zagotavlja in ali ne vsebuje informacij ki se nana ajo na prometne in cestne predpise podatkov o vozilu vklju no z maso vi ino
278. tination by selecting a place from the Favourite list registered beforehand from the Frequent list The places entered as the 1 From the Destination menu or the Navi destination are registered to the Frequent list Shortcut menu touch the lt 2 key automatically The Favourite list screen is displayed 1 From the Destination menu or the Navi When your desired icon is not displayed Shortcut menu touch the ND key touch the lt lt or gt gt key to scroll the list The Favourite list screen is displayed 2 Touch the desired icon you wish to set as 2 Touch the egar Frequent key destination The Frequent list screen is displayed The Set Location menu screen is displayed When your desired icon is not displayed 3 Confirm the location of the destination then touch the lt lt or gt gt key to scroll the list touch the OK key 3 Confirm the location of the destination then 4 Touch the Start key touch the OK key 4 Touch the Start key Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 27 Setting the Destination and Starting the Route Guidance Set Location menu A Set Location OK Nearhy POI POI Info Store Location From the Set Location menu displayed when setting the searched place as the destination you can perform the following operations according to the conditions OK key Sets the location shown by the ig on the map as the destination Add to Route key Wh
279. tion such as BBC R2 is being received The REG function ON OFF setting is enabled only when the AF function is ON Switching ON OFF the REG function 1 Touch the Option key 2 Touch the ON or OFF key of the REG item to turn the function on or off Manually tuning a regional station in the same network Note This function can be used when a regional broadcast of the same network is received This function is enabled only when the AF function is ON and the REG function is OFF 1 Touch your desired Preset key to call out a regional station 2 Each time you touch the same Preset key this unit switches from a local station to the other on the same network Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals PTY Programme Type function This function enables you to listen to a broadcast of the specified programme type when the broadcast starts even if the system operates ina mode other than the Tuner mode e Some countries do not yet have PTY broadcast In the TA standby mode a TP station has priority over a PTY broadcast station Selecting PTY 1 Touch the Option key 2 Touch the Preset key of the PTY Select item The system enters into the PTY select mode 3 Touch your desired PTY item key to select the programme type The following table shows the factory default settings stored for the Preset keys Preset PTY item number ENGLISH Contents 1 News News 2 Info In
280. tle chapter number does not exist or searching with a title chapter number is not allowed the screen image will not change Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Scan playback Scans and plays back all chapters recorded on the disc the first 10 seconds for each e This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Showing the DVD video mode screen touch the Option key 2 Touch the Chapter key of the Scan item then touch the Back key The C SCN will be displayed After scan playback of all chapters on the disc chapter scanning through the same disc is performed again Depending on the disc the menu may appear again after scan playback of all chapters within the title 3 To return to the normal playback at the currently played chapter touch the screen to show the DVD video mode screen and touch the lt lt key Repeat playback This operation plays back the current chapter repeatedly e This operation cannot be performed from the AV Shortcut menu screen 1 Showing the DVD video mode screen touch the Option key 2 Touch the Chapter key of the Repeat item then touch the Back key The C RPT will be displayed 3 Perform the same operation to turn off the repeat playback Switching among languages On discs in which two or more audios or audio languages have been recorded you can switch among the audio languages during playback e This operation can
281. tracks and can be edited The tracks on the map are displayed using the colour of the mark displayed left ofthe registered name You can also setthe system to always display the current track Note You can also register edit them from the Stored Data of the Setting menu Stored Tracking P 50 1 Touch the Tracking Display Settings key The list of track data is displayed 2 Touch the desired menu item To register a track Registers the current track data 1 Touch the ON key ofthe None Add New item 2 On the displayed confirmation screen touch the Yes key To show hide track 1 Touch the ON or OFF key from the list screen of track data The setting of the track data display is changed To set to always display the current track touch the ON key of the Current Tracking To edit a registered track 1 Touch the Edit key of Registered name from the list of track data For the Current Tracking only the Map and Delete key are displayed Map You can confirm the registered track data on the map Rename You can change the name of the registered track data Replace Deletes the registered track data and register the current track data Delete Deletes the registered track data OK Terminates the editing and returns to the list of track data Quick POI Settings Note You can also set the categories of the Quick POI from the Navi Shortcut me
282. ts The factory default setting is ON 1 Touch the ON or OFF key of the Auto Answer item to set the function ON or OFF Setting Microphone Gain You can adjust the input level of the microphone in 3 levels 1 Touch the or key of the Microphone Gain item to adjust the input level Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Setting Ring Tone Volume This system can generate a ring tone if the ring tone of the mobile phone cannot be used You can adjust the volume of the ring tone in 8 levels The factory default setting is 0 OFF 1 Touch the or key of the Ring Tone Volume item to adjust the volume level Note Normally set to 0 to use the ring tone of the mobile phone and adjust the volume from the mobile phone Confirming information of Interface Box You can confirm the various information concerning the Bluetooth Interface Box 1 Touch the Info key of the Bluetooth Device Information item to display the information on the screen Setting Phone Speaker You can select the output speaker of telephone calls e The factory default setting is Right 1 Touch the Y key to display the next screen 2 Touch the Left or Right key of the Phone Speaker item to select the speaker Left Telephone calls are heard from the front left speaker Right Telephone calls are heard from the front right speaker Telephone operations Making a call using the T
283. ts e Pressing the gt gt I button starts playback from the beginning of the next track Pressing the 144 button starts playback from the beginning of the current track When pressing this button again within about 2 seconds playback starts from the beginning of the previous track To perform this operation from the AV Shortcut menu screen use the Track keys instead of the 14 and PPI Search buttons These functions perform in the current folder only Fast forward and fast backward 1 Keep pressing the I lt or gt gt I Search button during playback The playback speed becomes 10 times faster Releasing the button resumes the normal speed playback To perform this operation from the AV Shortcut menu screen use the Track keys instead of the 141 and gt gt Search buttons Skipping the current folder 1 Touch a Folder key during playback The tracks of the current folder are skipped and playback starts from the first track of the next or previous folder Selecting a folder track from the List screen 1 Touch the List key The Folder list screen is displayed 2 When the desired folder is not displayed touch the A or Y key to scroll the list 3 Touch the desired Folder key The Track list screen appears 4 Touch the A or Y key to scroll the list and touch the desired Track key The corresponding track is started playback 5 Touch the Back key Downloaded from Caradio M
284. ttings You can return this system to the status after purchase Note e When the system is reset to the factory settings all stored data is erased including the music data in the Music Catcher It is recommended that you backup all data you want to keep Reset to Factory Setting When touching the Reset key a screen with confirmation message appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen Software amp Map Update You can update the system software and the map data Software amp Map Update When touching the Start key a screen with message prompting to insert the update disc appears Operate according to the guidance on the screen Screen Adjustment The position and sharpness of the screen can be adjusted Screen Adjustment After touching the Adjust key adjust the screen position by touching the lt A gt and v key Touch the 1 or 2 key to select a setting at which the screen is displayed clearly Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Setting Safety Camera From the Safety Camera menu you can set the Safety Camera 1 Touch the gt gt Next key from the Setting menu 2 Touch the Safety Camera key to display the Safety Camera menu 3 Touch the desired menu item to set Show Icon on Map Turns ON OFF the Safety Camera Icon display on the map Warning amp Sound Turns ON OFF both of the warning indication and alar
285. ttons are pressed Display is not accurate The microprocessor has malfunctioned due to noise etc Turn off the power and open the operation panel Press the Reset button with a thin rod Note When the Reset button is pressed the system is restarted with the Audio feature OFF jenuew saumo When the Reset button is pressed frequencies of radio stations titles etc audio setting data stored in memory are cleared There are red green or blue points in the display This is not a failure but a phenomenon peculiar to a liquid crystal panel The liquid crystal panel is produced according to technology with very high precision Note that though there are effective pixels of 99 99 or more pixel missing or normally lit pixels account for 0 01 DVD Player Disc cannot be loaded Another disc is already loaded Eject the disc before loading the new one There is a foreign matter already in place Eject the foreign matter forcibly Sound skips or is noisy The disc is dirty Clean the disc with a soft cloth The disc is heavily scratched or warped Replace with a disc with no scratches Sound is bad directly after power is turned on Water droplets may form on the internal lens when the car is parked in a humid place Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on The image is not displayed The parking brake is not engaged Check that the parki
286. turned off and it does not resume the 2Zone ON status even when the interruption is finished only when the TV tuner is connected Assignable media sources for Front Rear zone For Front zone All the sources except for the Telephone mode can be assigned for the Front zone For Rear zone The following sources can be assigned DVD video mode e TV Tuner mode AUX mode Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD 19 jenuew 5 12UMQ 3 Operations of Basic Features Radio Operations In addition to the ordinal tuner functions this unit has a built in RDS decoder system that supports broadcast stations transmitting RDS data Using this system the following functions are available TA Traffic Announcement function AF Alternative Frequency function REG Regional Programme function PTY Programme Type function Note When you store a station without broadcasting RDS data to the preset memory store the station after receiving more than 10 seconds If you store such a station within 10 seconds it will be stored as an RDS station and the RDS tracking function will work when tuning in Selecting the Tuner mode 1 Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen 2 Touch the FM AM key to select the Tuner mode The Tuner mode screen is displayed Tuner mode screen Preset key pane GE FM AM Option 0 00 Frequency Information pane Band AV
287. u entered as destination is higher than others and the date is newer than others are registered and sorted automatically 2D List screen P 56 Displaying Favourite Frequent list To display the Favourite Frequent list screen press the MENU button and touch the 2 key or press the MAP button and touch the NAVI key and then touch the 2 key from the Navi Shortcut menu Touching the amp Favourite or gal Frequent key switches the screen Large icons which indicate the category of registered places are displayed in each screen 4 54 MAX983HD FUJI SAN SW17 LONDON bake ESSO NE CROWN GAT AB BUSINES Switching Angle Touch the a key to switch the viewing angle 3D List screen FUJI SAN SW17 LONDON Back ar W CROWN GAT AB BUSINES FUJI SAN SW EATHROW LON gg py ESSO NEWARK Back Z a amp CROWN GATE SH Y AB BUSINESS CEN Y FUJI san sw CROSS KEYS CRA Y KAMBALA RD DA MBALA RD BA Using Favourite Frequent List Favourite Frequent menu 3D List screen LONDON VICTORIA HOLLYWOO O lt lt gt gt key Scrolls the list to display other icons Up to 5 icons are displayed on the screen amp Favourite key Switches to the Favourite list screen car Frequent key Switches to the Frequent list screen O 3 Recent Album key Switches to the Recent Album list screen See the Audio M
288. ub jako ci nawierzchni informacji o przeszkodach w tym o wysoko ci i szeroko ci most w i tuneli ani adnych innych informacji dotycz cych warunk w jazdy i lub warunk w drogowych U ytkownik powinien zawsze polega na swojej w asnej ocenie sytuacji uwzgl dniaj c panuj ce warunki na drodze U ytkownik powinien zmniejszy do minimum czas po wi cany na spogladanie na ekran w trakcie jazdy t nloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Biztons gi vint zked sek Figyelmeztetes A jelen navig ci s rendszer nem helyettes ti az n it l k pess g t A navig ci s rendszer altal adott b rmilyen tvonaljavaslat nem p tolja a helyi k zlekedesi szab lyokat az n megit l s t s vagy az On biztons gos vezet s t A navig ci s rendszer tvonaljavaslat t hagyja figyelmen kiv l amennyiben az arra vezetne hogy nnek veszelyes vagy szab lys rt man vert kellene v grehajtania nt vesz lyes helyzetbe hozza illetve nt a megit l se szerint nem biztons gos helyre vezeti A navig ci s rendszer ltal adott utasit s kiz r lag javaslatnak min s l El fordulhat hogy a navig ci s rendszer a j rm helyzet t nem pontosan jel li nem vagy nem pontosan mutatja a legr videbb tvonalat s vagy nem vezet a kijel lt cel llom sra Ezekben az esetekben az adott tviszonyok figyelembev tele mellett hagyatkozzon saj t vezet si tapasztalat ra e Ne haszn lja a n
289. uching the None Add New key in case the route contains at least one waypoint You can also register the current route using the Route menu Stored Route P 50 1 Touch the gt gt Next key 2 Touch the Stored Routes key 3 From the displayed stored route list touch the route you wish to set 4 Touch the Start key By Extra POI You can set the downloaded data from website as a destination For more information about the setting method see the Clarion homepage MAX983HD 25 Searching Your Destination from the Map Screen You can search for a place by scrolling the map and set it as the destination 1 Scroll the map by touching the Map screen 2 Confirm the location of the destination then and move the cursor to the place you wish to touch the New Dest key go to Touch the OK key gt Scrolling the 3 Touch the Start key Map P 16 Note When you search a place far from the current location change the map scale to search more quickly Searching for POI Using the Quick POI Function By using the Navi Shortcut menu you can enter a destination by searching a place near the current position or along the route quickly from five POI categories specified before in the Setting menu When the destination has been set you can specify POls that you want to visit along the route as waypoints and you can search them quickly You can customise the five categories in the Setting menu
290. usting the BASS The bass gain bass frequency centre frequency and bass O can be adjusted 1 Touch the Edit key of the BASS item 2 Touch the or key for the desirable type to adjust to a desirable level Gain 6 to 8 The factory default setting is 0 FREQ 50Hz 80Hz 120Hz The factory default setting is 50Hz Q 1 1 25 1 5 2 The factory default setting is 4 Adjusting the MID The MID gain MID frequency centre frequency and MID Q can be adjusted 1 Touch the Edit key of the MID item 2 Touch the or key for the desirable type to adjust to a desirable level Gain 6 to 6 The factory default setting is 0 FREQ 700Hz 1kHz 2kHz The factory default setting is 1kHz Q 1 5 2 The factory default setting is 2 Adjusting the TREBLE The treble gain and treble frequency centre frequency can be adjusted 1 Touch the Edit key of the TREBLE item 2 Touch the or key for the desirable type to adjust to a desirable level Gain 6 to 6 The factory default setting is 0 FREQ 8kHz 12kHz The factory default setting is 12kHz Turning on off the Magna Bass EX The Magna Bass EX does not adjust the low sound area like the normal sound adjustment function but emphasises the deep bass sound area to provide you with a dynamic sound e The factory default setting is OFF Switching the CD Recording mode You can setthe CD Rec
291. uto store function for TP stations You can automatically store up to 6 TP stations into the preset memory If the number of TP that can be received is less than 6 the broadcast stations already stored in memory are left without being overwritten 1 When TA is displayed on the screen touch and hold the AS key for more than 2 seconds The TP stations with a good reception condition are stored into the preset memory Even if you select FM1 or FM2 TP stations are stored into the memory for AS Ppwnloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Radio Operations AF Alternative Frequency function The AF function switches to a different frequency on the same network in order to maintain optimum reception Switching ON OFF the AF function 1 Touch the Option key 2 Touch the ON or OFF key ofthe AF item to turn the function on or off e When the AF function is ON AF will be displayed at the bottom of the screen e If the reception of the current broadcast station deteriorates durably PI Searching is displayed on the screen and this unit searches for the same programme on another frequency REG Regional Programme function When the REG function is ON the optimum regional station can be received When this function is OFF if the regional station area is switched as you drive a regional station for that region is received Note This function is disabled when a national sta
292. vices at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Gracenote 2008 Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals 7 MAX983HD jenuew s 19UMQ Contents 1 POCO iii EE rina 3 Safety Precautions wed About This Manual sd Notes on Handling ch Notes on Data Stored in This System an6 About the registered marks etc a6 Contents une 8 2 Basic Operations 9 Name and Function of the Controls 219 Menu Types and Operation 11 Turning the Power ON OFF nennen 12 Opening the Operation Panel and Adjusting the Angle 13 Switching the Operation Mode 14 Turning the Audio OFF 14 Turning the Monitor OFF 14 Adjusting the Volume 14 Setting Ejecting a Disc 15 Setting Ejecting an SD Card 17 Selecting Media Source 18 2Zone Function sg 3 Operations of Basic Features ii 20 Radio Operations
293. y provided during playback Dolby Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Menu screens Menus can be called up during DVD video playback to perform menu selection Selecting the DVD Video mode 1 Set a DVD video disc to the DVD player The system will automatically read the disc data change to the DVD Video mode and start playback after a while gt Setting Ejecting a Disc P 15 WARNING Some videos may be recorded at a higher volume level than desired Increase the volume gradually from the minimal setting after the video has started For your safety the driver should not watch the video or operate the controls while driving Please note that watching and operating the video while driving are prohibited by law in some countries Note For your safety this system has a safety function which turns off the picture when the car is moving so only the audio can be heard The picture can only be watched when the car is stopped and the parking brake is applied MAX983HD 25 jenuew 5 12UMQ DVD Video Operations When a DVD video disc is already set 1 N Press the SRC Source button to display the Source menu screen Touch the DVD CD key to select the DVD Video mode The system changes to the DVD Video mode and starts playback from the previous position DVD Video mode scree
294. y not be displayed on the screen Roads and places where the vehicle cannot pass such as roads in housing areas site or in installations and roads under construction may be included in the suggested route The passed waypoints are not included for route recalculation When you set waypoints the system calculates the routes between every point Therefore the following notes apply If a route between certain waypoints is not found no route may be displayed e The route may not be connected in the vicinity of a waypoint A U turn may be required at a waypoint The route calculation may not be completed in the following cases If there is no main road within a range of approx 5 km 3 miles from the current location If there is no main road within a range of approx 5 km 3 miles from the destination or waypoints If the vehicle is too close to the destination In this case a message to inform you about this will be displayed If it is impossible to reach the destination or waypoints because of traffic regulations etc If the map database does not contain the area data of the selected locations If only an extremely roundabout route is available to reach the destination or waypoints e When displaying a route the followings may occur Even if a route calculation is requested on a main road the start point of the suggested route may not exactly match the current vehicle location If a route calculation
295. y not reach sufficiently due to obstruction of mountains or buildings Check it again at a place where a radio wave can be received properly The TV tuner has a double or triple image Bad receiving condition It may be under the influence of radio wave reflected by mountains or buildings Check it again after changing place or direction The TV tuner has spots or stripes in the image Presence of jamming lt may be under the influence from motorcars streetcar power cable neon sign and so forth Check it again after changing place Mobile Phone When the optional Bluetooth Interface Box is connected The mobile phone cannot be connected The relevant profile is not selected on the mobile phone When selecting profiles is available select a profile with hands free feature Otherwise register the mobile phone again after deleting it from the Phone Select screen The Interface Box is trying to restore the connection with the previous mobile phone Turn off the Automatic Connection function then register the mobile phone again The system does not operate correctly There is no response from the mobile phone Turn off the power of the mobile phone then turn it on again Strange noise is heard from the speakers The remaining battery level of the mobile phone is low Charge the battery of the mobile phone Hownloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD
296. y of the Extra POI item then operate according to the displayed messages To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive touch the Delete key Downloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals Safety Camera You can import the location database of Safety Cameras stored in the SD card to the hard disk drive Touch the Import key of Safety Camera then operate according to the displayed messages To delete the data imported to the hard disk drive touch the Delete key Note This function displays the locations of Safety Cameras on the map using the imported location database of the Safety Camera on the hard disk drive and warns that the vehicle approaches the location For details see the Clarion s homepage Be sure to import the location database of Safety Cameras while the vehicle is stopped The message Reading Safety Camera data disappears when the import is finished If the vehicle starts to move before the message disappears the import will be cancelled Other data You can also import the following data Image data Album Infromation data For the detailed information on importing these data see the Audio Manual MAX983HD 51 Service Options From the Service Option menu you can perform the operation such as displaying a demonstration of the navigation system backup or restore of stored data and resetting to the factory settings 1 Touch the gt Next key from the Sett
297. y touching the TMC Traffic Info Settings key you can change the settings for the TMC information indicators and the TMC provider Setting TMC traffic information P 40 apwoloaded from Caradio Manual com Manuals MAX983HD Displaying the Traffic Information Displaying traffic information on the route Confirms the traffic information on the current route 1 Touch the Traffic Info on Route key The TMC event list is displayed in order of distance from the current location on the current route The time of the event received is displayed on the right side of the list 2 Touch the desired event Detailed information of the event is displayed Touch the a v key to Scroll the detailed information screen G Traffic Info on Route AY in 2km On AS des in 2km On A4 Stat Z In 30km On N118 5 O Please select a menu item for detail The position and the TMC traffic information symbol of the selected event information are displayed on the map E Traffic Info on Route Direction ABS Roissy toward Paris Porte de Be In 2km On A4 Autoroute de l est Between Joinville and Paris Porte de Bercy Push up down key for text scrolling Touch the Back key to return to the previous screen Displaying nearby traffic information You can confirm all the traffic information that are within 50 km in the radius of the current location 1 Touch the Nearby Traffic Info key Th

Clarion MAX983HD User Guide Manual - CaRadio

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents